Home › CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Mode)

CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Mode)

File info: application/pdf · 264 pages · 13.78MB

SH-082240ENG-E

CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE ...

Full PDF Document

If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.

Extracted Text

CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Mode)
-NZ2GN2S1-16D -NZ2GN2S1-32D -NZ2GN2B1-16D -NZ2GN2B1-32D -NZ2GNCF1-32D -NZ2GNCE3-32D -NZ2GN12A4-16D -NZ2GN12A4-16DE -NZ2GN2S1-16T -NZ2GN2S1-32T -NZ2GN2B1-16T -NZ2GN2B1-32T -NZ2GNCF1-32T -NZ2GN12A2-16T -NZ2GN2S1-16TE -NZ2GN2S1-32TE -NZ2GN2B1-16TE -NZ2GN2B1-32TE -NZ2GN12A2-16TE -NZ2GN2S1-32DT -NZ2GN2B1-32DT -NZ2GNCE3-32DT -NZ2GN12A42-16DT -NZ2GN2S1-32DTE -NZ2GN2B1-32DTE -NZ2GN12A42-16DTE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system, refer to the user's manual for the CPU module used. In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".
WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to serious consequences. Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety. Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
In the case of a communication failure in the network, data of the master station are held. Check Data link status (each station) (SW00B0 to SW00B7) and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely.
When the module is disconnected due to a communication failure in the network or the CPU module is in the STOP state, outputs are held or turned off according to the output HOLD/CLEAR setting. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even in such a case. If not, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of the module. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
Do not use any "use prohibited" signals as a remote input or output signal. These signals are reserved for system use. Do not write any data to the "use prohibited" areas in the remote register. If these operations are performed, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

[Design Precautions]
CAUTION
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.
During control of an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve, a large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on. Therefore, use a module that has a sufficient current rating.

[Security Precautions] WARNING
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
[Installation Precautions] WARNING
Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing a module. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.
[Installation Precautions] CAUTION
Use the module in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.
Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.
Securely connect the cable connectors. Poor contact may cause malfunction. After the first use of the product, do not connect/remove the connector more than 50 times (IEC
61131-2/JIS B 3502 compliant). Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction. Securely fix the waterproof/dustproof module with the mounting screws. If not, the module will be
greatly affected by vibration, causing failure of the module.
[Wiring Precautions] WARNING
Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.
2

[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
Individually ground the FG terminal of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
Tighten any unused terminal screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal.
Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when a terminal block screw comes loose, resulting in failure.
Before wiring to the module or to loads, check the rated voltage and terminal layout of the module, and connect the cables correctly. Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure.
Tighten the terminal block screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module. Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in malfunction or damage to modules or cables. In addition, the weight of the cables may put stress on modules in an environment of strong vibrations and shocks.
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.
When disconnecting the cable from the module, do not pull the cable by the cable part. For the cable with connector, hold the connector part of the cable. For the cable connected to the terminal block, loosen the terminal screw. Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable.
When an overcurrent caused by an error of an external device or a failure of the programmable controller flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels. Wiring and replacement of a module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. For wiring methods, refer to "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" in this manual.
When attaching waterproof caps to the waterproof/dustproof module, tighten the caps within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the cap, resulting in short circuit or malfunction.
For the waterproof/dustproof module, periodically check the connectors (such as I/O connectors, communication connectors, and power supply connectors) and the screws of indicator cover. Retighten any connectors and screws that are loose.
The waterproof/dustproof module is compliant with IP67 only when all necessary waterproof connectors and caps have been installed and the indicator cover has been properly tightened with screws.
For the waterproof/dustproof module, do not remove the gasket from the indicator cover to keep waterproofing of the cover.
Attach waterproof caps to the waterproof/dustproof module to prevent dirt and dust from entering the module, or prevent the static electricity from causing the module to fail or malfunction.
3

[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
For waterproof cables used for the waterproof/dustproof module, use UL listed cables in the categories "CYJV" and "PVVA", with the suitable voltage, current, and temperature rating (the operating temperature range of the cables: 75 or higher).
Do not replace or wire the waterproof/dustproof module immediately after powering off the system because the connector parts of the module can get really hot depending on the load conditions.
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
WARNING
Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction. Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module,
retightening the terminal block screws or connector screws, or operating the IP address/station number setting switches. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the module. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module. Doing so may damage the module. Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone
System) more than 25cm away from wiring as well as away in all directions from the programmable controller. Failure to do so may cause malfunction. Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing a module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction. After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the terminal block to/from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2/JIS B 3502 compliant). Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction. After the first use of the product, do not connect/remove the connector more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2/JIS B 3502 compliant). Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction. Before handling the module or connection cables, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction. Startup and maintenance of a control panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. Lock the control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it.
[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
4

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions; i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; � Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. � Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. � Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.
(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
5

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the CC-Link IE TSN remote I/O module and the waterproof/dustproof remote I/O module (hereafter referred to as I/O module). This manual describes the procedures, system configuration, parameter settings, functions, and troubleshooting required to use the following modules in CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode. Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the I/O module to handle the product correctly. When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system, ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.
CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode
When using the I/O module as an intelligent device station on CC-Link IE Field Network, select CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode. To operate the I/O module in CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode, set the function setting switch 1 to ON. ( Page 117 Function setting switch setting)
I/O modules with the firmware version of 02 or later are compatible with CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode. For other system information, refer to the following. Page 108 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Relevant products
NZ2GN2S1-16D, NZ2GN2S1-32D, NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-32D, NZ2GNCF1-32D, NZ2GNCE3-32D, NZ2GN12A416D, NZ2GN12A4-16DE, NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2S1-32T, NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-32T, NZ2GNCF1-32T, NZ2GN2S1-16TE, NZ2GN2S1-32TE, NZ2GN2B1-16TE, NZ2GN2B1-32TE, NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN12A2-16TE, NZ2GN2S1-32DT, NZ2GN2B1-32DT, NZ2GNCE3-32DT, NZ2GN2S1-32DTE, NZ2GN2B1-32DTE, NZ2GN12A42-16DT, NZ2GN12A42-16DTE
Unless otherwise specified, this manual describes the program examples in which the remote I/O signals and remote registers are assigned for an I/O module as follows. � Remote input signals: RX0 to RX1F � Remote output signals: RY0 to RY1F � Remote register: RWr0 to RWr4F � Remote register: RWw0 to RWw4F For the assignment of remote I/O signals and remote registers, refer to the following. Page 173 Program Example
6

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT LINEUP

1.1 List of Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Input modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 I/O combined module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 I/O combined module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 3.3 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

106

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

108

5.1 Applicable Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

110

6.1 Before Using the I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Input modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 I/O combined module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.2 Setting Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Indicator cover of the I/O module (waterproof module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Setting the IP address/station number setting switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Function setting switch setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.3 Installation Environment and Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Installation environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Installation direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Mounting the I/O modules (except for waterproof module) on a DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Fixing the I/O module (waterproof module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.5 Wiring of Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 6.6 Wiring of Connector for Module Power Supply and FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 6.7 Wiring the I/O Module (Waterproof Module) to the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 6.8 Wiring of Ethernet Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Wiring of spring clamp terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Wiring of screw terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wiring of 40-pin connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Wiring of sensor connector (e-CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Wiring of waterproof connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.10 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 6.11 Attaching Waterproof Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING

150

7.1 Network Configuration Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

152

8.1 Input Response Time Setting Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 8.2 Output HOLD/CLEAR Setting Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Synchronous X/Y control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Synchronization cycle timing control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 8.4 Fast Link-Up Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 How to use the fast link-up function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 8.5 Output ON/OFF Information Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 8.6 Protection Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 8.7 Module Power Supply Voltage Drop Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 8.8 External Power Supply Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 8.9 Firmware Update Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING

171

9.1 Precautions for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 9.2 Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

183

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

185

11.1 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 11.2 Checking the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 11.3 Unit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 11.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Troubleshooting for input circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Troubleshooting for output circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 11.7 Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

APPENDICES

213

Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 List of remote I/O signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Details of remote input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Details of remote output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Appendix 2 Remote Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 List of remote registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Details of remote registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 List of remote buffer memory areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Details of remote buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Appendix 4 CC-Link IE Field Network Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Measures to comply with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Appendix 6 How to Check Production Information and Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Appendix 7 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

INDEX

256

REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

CONTENTS

RELEVANT MANUALS

Manual name [manual number]

Description

CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CCLink IE Field Network Communication Mode) [SH-082240ENG] (this manual)

Part names, specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation, wiring, parameter settings, functions, programming, troubleshooting, I/O signals, and remote buffer memory of the I/O module to be used in CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode

CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CCLink IE TSN Communication Mode) [SH-082135ENG]

Part names, specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation, wiring, parameter settings, functions, programming, troubleshooting, and I/O signals of the I/O module to be used in CC-Link IE TSN communication mode

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup) [SH-081256ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, wiring, and communication examples of Ethernet, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CCLink IE Field Network

MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application) [SH-081259ENG]

Functions, parameter settings, programming, troubleshooting, I/O signals, and buffer memory of CC-Link IE Field Network

MELSEC iQ-R Inter-Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual [SH-081401ENG]
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual [SH-080972ENG]

Inter-module synchronization function, which controls multiple modules synchronously
Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation, wiring, settings, functions, programming, and troubleshooting of CC-Link IE Field Network and LJ71GF11-T2

MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual [SH-080917ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation, wiring, settings, functions, programming, and troubleshooting of CC-Link IE Field Network and QJ71GF11-T2

MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Network) [IB-0300307ENG]

Functions, parameter settings, troubleshooting, and buffer memory of CC-Link IE Field Network

MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Application) [IB-0300247ENG]

Functions, parameter settings, I/O signals, buffer memory, programming, and troubleshooting of the Simple Motion module

MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Advanced Synchronous Control) [IB-0300249ENG]

Functions and programming related to synchronous control of the Simple Motion module

MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Positioning Control) [IB-0300202]
MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Network) [IB-0300203]
GX Works3 Operating Manual [SH-081215ENG]
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) [SH-080779ENG]

Specifications of the QD77GF and information on how to establish a system, maintenance and inspection, and troubleshooting. Functions, programming and buffer memory for the positioning control of the QD77GF Functions, programming, and troubleshooting for CC-Link IE Field Network of the QD77GF
System configuration, parameter settings, and online operations of GX Works3
Functions common to Simple and Structured projects, such as the system configuration, parameter settings, and online function operation methods of GX Works2

Available form Print book e-Manual PDF
Print book e-Manual PDF
Print book e-Manual PDF Print book e-Manual PDF e-Manual PDF
Print book e-Manual PDF Print book e-Manual PDF Print book e-Manual PDF Print book e-Manual PDF Print book e-Manual PDF Print book PDF
Print book PDF
e-Manual PDF Print book e-Manual PDF

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: � Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. � Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. � The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. � Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. � Sample programs can be copied to an engineering tool.

TERMS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

Term Cyclic transmission Data link Engineering tool Intelligent device station
Link device Local station Master station
Remote device station
Reserved station Slave station
Transient transmission

Description
A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link devices
Communications performed by cyclic transmission and transient transmission
A tool used for setting up programmable controllers, programming, debugging, and maintenance
A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) and I/O data (word data) with the master station by cyclic transmission. This station can perform transient transmission as well. This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station.
A device (RX, RY, RWr, RWw, SB, or SW) in a module or a board on CC-Link IE Field Network
A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local stations.
A station that controls the entire network. This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with all stations. Only one master station can be used in a network.
A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) and I/O data (word data) with the master station by cyclic transmission. This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station.
A station reserved for future use. This station is not actually connected, but counted as a connected station.
A station other than a master station: a local station, a remote I/O station, a remote device station, and an intelligent device station
A function of communication with another station, which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or an engineering tool

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.

Generic term/abbreviation

Description

A/D converter module

An abbreviation for the CC-Link IE TSN analog-digital converter module

CC-Link IE TSN remote module

A generic term for an A/D converter module, a D/A converter module, an I/O module

D/A converter module

An abbreviation for the CC-Link IE TSN digital-analog converter module

I/O combined module

A generic term for modules that can input and output a digital signal

I/O combined module (except for waterproof module)

A generic term for modules except for waterproof/dustproof modules that can input and output a digital signal

I/O combined module (waterproof module)

A generic term for waterproof/dustproof modules that can input and output a digital signal

I/O module

An abbreviation for the CC-Link IE TSN remote I/O module

I/O module (except for waterproof module)

An abbreviation for the CC-Link IE TSN remote I/O module that is not waterproof or dustproof

I/O module (waterproof module)

An abbreviation for the CC-Link IE TSN waterproof/dustproof remote I/O module

Input module

A generic term for modules that can input a digital signal

Input module (except for waterproof A generic term for modules except for waterproof/dustproof modules that can input a digital signal module)

Input module (waterproof module) A generic term for waterproof/dustproof modules that can input a digital signal

Output module

A generic term for modules that can output a digital signal

Output module (except for waterproof module)

A generic term for modules except for waterproof/dustproof modules that can output a digital signal

Output module (waterproof module) A generic term for waterproof/dustproof modules that can output a digital signal

REMFR

The abbreviation for ZP.REMFR.

REMFRD

An abbreviation for JP.REMFRD

REMTO

The abbreviation for ZP.REMTO.

REMTOD

An abbreviation for JP.REMTOD

RWr

An abbreviation for the remote register of link device. RWr refers to word data input from a slave station to the master

station (For some areas in a local station, data are input in the opposite direction.)

RWw

An abbreviation for the remote register of link device. RWw refers to word data output from the master station to a slave station (For some areas in a local station, data are output in the opposite direction.)

An abbreviation for remote input of link device. Bit data input from a slave station to the master station (For some areas

in a local station, data are input in the opposite direction.)

An abbreviation for remote output of link device. Bit data output from the master station to a slave station (For some

areas in a local station, data are output in the opposite direction.)

1 PRODUCT LINEUP 1
1.1 List of Products

Input modules

Module name

Input specifications

DC input module

Positive common/ negative common shared type
Positive common type
Negative common type

Spring clamp terminal block 24VDC, 16 points
Spring clamp terminal block 24VDC, 32 points
Screw terminal block 24VDC, 16 points
Screw terminal block 24VDC, 32 points
40-pin connector 24VDC, 32 points
Sensor connector (e-CON) 24VDC, 32 points
Waterproof connector 24VDC, 16 points
Waterproof connector 24VDC, 16 points

Module power supply current 110mA
110mA
110mA
110mA
110mA
110mA
250mA
250mA

Weight Model

Reference

0.15kg 0.20kg 0.21kg 0.31kg 0.20kg 0.25kg 0.41kg 0.41kg

NZ2GN2S1-16D NZ2GN2S1-32D NZ2GN2B1-16D NZ2GN2B1-32D NZ2GNCF1-32D NZ2GNCE3-32D NZ2GN12A4-16D NZ2GN12A4-16DE

Page 21 NZ2GN2S1-16D DC input module
Page 24 NZ2GN2S1-32D DC input module
Page 27 NZ2GN2B1-16D DC input module
Page 30 NZ2GN2B1-32D DC input module
Page 33 NZ2GNCF1-32D DC input module
Page 36 NZ2GNCE3-32D DC input module
Page 40 NZ2GN12A4-16D DC input module
Page 43 NZ2GN12A4-16DE DC input module

1 PRODUCT LINEUP 1.1 List of Products

Output modules

Module name

Transistor

Sink type

output module

Source type

Output specifications
Spring clamp terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points Spring clamp terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 32 points Screw terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points Screw terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 32 points 40-pin connector 12/24VDC, 0.1A/point, 32 points Waterproof connector 12/24VDC, 4A/point (Y0 to Y3), 2A/point (Y4 to YF), 16 points Spring clamp terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points Spring clamp terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 32 points Screw terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points Screw terminal block 12/24VDC, 0.5A/point, 32 points Waterproof connector 12/24VDC, 4A/point (Y0 to Y3), 2A/point (Y4 to YF), 16 points

Module power supply current 110mA 120mA 110mA 120mA 120mA 110mA
110mA 120mA 110mA 120mA 110mA

Weight Model

Reference

0.15kg 0.18kg 0.21kg 0.29kg 0.16kg 0.42kg
0.15kg 0.18kg 0.21kg 0.29kg 0.42kg

NZ2GN2S1-16T NZ2GN2S1-32T NZ2GN2B1-16T NZ2GN2B1-32T NZ2GNCF1-32T NZ2GN12A2-16T

Page 46 NZ2GN2S1-16T transistor output module
Page 49 NZ2GN2S1-32T transistor output module
Page 52 NZ2GN2B1-16T transistor output module
Page 55 NZ2GN2B1-32T transistor output module
Page 58 NZ2GNCF1-32T transistor output module
Page 61 NZ2GN12A2-16T transistor output module

NZ2GN2S1-16TE NZ2GN2S1-32TE NZ2GN2B1-16TE NZ2GN2B1-32TE NZ2GN12A2-16TE

Page 64 NZ2GN2S1-16TE transistor output module
Page 67 NZ2GN2S1-32TE transistor output module
Page 70 NZ2GN2B1-16TE transistor output module
Page 73 NZ2GN2B1-32TE transistor output module
Page 76 NZ2GN12A2-16TE transistor output module

1 PRODUCT LINEUP 1.1 List of Products

I/O combined module

Module name

Input

Output

Module Weight Model

Reference

specifications specifications

power

supply

current

DC input/ transistor output module

� Input part: Positive common type
� Output part: Sink type

Spring clamp terminal block 24VDC, 16 points
Screw terminal block 24VDC, 16 points

Spring clamp terminal block 24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points
Screw terminal block 24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points

110mA 110mA

� Input part: Negative common type
� Output part: Source type

Sensor connector (e-CON) 24VDC, 16 points
Waterproof connector 24VDC, 8 points
Spring clamp terminal block 24VDC, 16 points
Screw terminal block 24VDC, 16 points

Sensor connector (eCON) 24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points
Waterproof connector 12/24VDC, 4A/point (Y8 to YB), 2A/point (YC to YF), 8 points
Spring clamp terminal block 24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points
Screw terminal block 24VDC, 0.5A/point, 16 points

110mA 160mA 110mA 110mA

Waterproof connector 24VDC, 8 points

Waterproof connector 12/24VDC, 4A/point (Y8 to YB), 2A/point (YC to YF), 8 points

160mA

0.20kg 0.31kg 0.25kg 0.42kg

NZ2GN2S1-32DT NZ2GN2B1-32DT NZ2GNCE3-32DT NZ2GN12A42-16DT

Page 79 NZ2GN2S1-32DT DC input/transistor output module
Page 83 NZ2GN2B1-32DT DC input/transistor output module
Page 87 NZ2GNCE3-32DT DC input/transistor output module
Page 91 NZ2GN12A42-16DT DC input/transistor output module

0.20kg 0.31kg 0.42kg

NZ2GN2S1-32DTE NZ2GN2B1-32DTE NZ2GN12A42-16DTE

Page 95 NZ2GN2S1-32DTE DC input/transistor output module
Page 98 NZ2GN2B1-32DTE DC input/transistor output module
Page 101 NZ2GN12A42-16DTE DC input/transistor output module

1 PRODUCT LINEUP 1.1 List of Products

2 PART NAMES

This section describes part names of the I/O module. � Spring clamp terminal block type

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

� Screw terminal block type

(1)

(2)

(3)

(8)

(9)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

� 40-pin connector type

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(8)

(9)

(4)

(5)

(7)

(8)

(8) (11)

� Sensor connector (e-CON) type

(2)

(1) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(10) (8) 2 PART NAMES

(8)

(11)

� Waterproof/dustproof connector type
(13) (6)

(12)

(1)

(4)

(5) (3)

(2)

(10)

(11)

(14)

No. Name

(1)

PW LED

RUN LED

ERR. LED

P1 LINK LED P2 LINK LED DATA LINK LED

(2)

IP address/station number

setting switch

(3)

Function setting switch

(4)

16-point module

X0 LED to XF LED

32-point module

X0 LED to X1F LED

16-point module Y0 LED to YF LED 32-point module Y0 LED to Y1F LED

(5)

I/O PW LED

Application
Indicates the power supply status of the I/O module. On: Power supply ON Off: Power supply OFF
Indicates the operating status of the I/O module. On: Operating normally. Flashing: Operating in unit test mode Off: A major error has occurred.
Indicates the error status of the I/O module. On: A moderate error or major error has occurred. Flashing: A minor error has occurred. Off: Operating normally.
Indicates the link status for P1. On: Link-up Off: Linkdown in progress
Indicates the link status for P2. On: Link-up Off: Linkdown in progress
Indicates the data link status of the I/O module. On: Cyclic transmission being performed Flashing: Cyclic transmission stopped Off: Disconnected
Sets the station number. Page 115 Setting the IP address/station number setting switches
Sets functions of the I/O module. Page 117 Function setting switch setting Indicates the ON/OFF status of the inputs.*1 On: Input ON Off: Input OFF
Indicates the ON/OFF status of the outputs.*2 On: Output ON Off: Output OFF
Indicates the status of the power supply from the external power supply. On: External power supply ON Off: External power supply OFF

2 PART NAMES

No. Name

Application

(6)

A port for the connection to CC-Link IE Field Network (RJ45 connector/M12 waterproof connector) Connect an Ethernet cable. ( Page 131 Wiring of Ethernet Cable) There are no restrictions on the connection order of the cables for P1 and P2.

Same as P1

(7)

Terminal block for module

power supply and FG

A terminal block to connect the module power supply (24VDC) and FG.

(8)

DIN rail hook

A hook to mount an I/O module on a DIN rail

(9)

I/O terminal block

A terminal block for I/O power supply and I/O signals

(10) Connector for module power A connector for the module power supply (24VDC) and FG supply and FG

(11) Connector for I/O

A connector for the I/O power supply and I/O signals

(12) Indicator cover

A protective cover for LEDs and switches

(13) FG metal fitting/mounting metal A metal fitting for FG connection or mounting the module fitting

(14) Module mounting hole

A hole for a module mounting screw

*1 The status of actual input signals that are externally input is indicated on the LEDs regardless of the status of the remote input signal. *2 Output commands from the I/O module are indicated on the LEDs regardless of the status of the external power supply.

I/O module status and LED status

The following table lists the correspondence between the I/O module status and the LED status.

I/O module status

Disconnected

Data link in operation

Reserved station setting in progress

Data link stop

Communication error

Unit test

In progress

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

Error

Major error

Moderate error

Minor error

LED status PW LED On On On On On On On On
On On On

RUN LED On On On On On Flashing On On
Off On On

DATA LINK LED Off On Flashing Flashing Flashing Off Off Off
*1 *1 *1

*1 Either of On, Flashing, or Off.

ERR. LED
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Off Off On
On On Flashing

2 PART NAMES

3 SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the specifications of the I/O module.
3.1 General Specifications

I/O module (except for waterproof module)

Item

Specifications

Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55

Storage ambient temperature -25 to 75

Operating ambient humidity

5 to 95%RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient humidity

Vibration resistance

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2

Under intermittent vibration

Frequency
5 to 8.4Hz 8.4 to 150Hz

Constant acceleration
9.8m/

Half amplitude
3.5mm

Under continuous vibration

5 to 8.4Hz 8.4 to 150Hz

4.9m/

1.75mm

Shock resistance

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions)

Operating atmosphere Operating altitude*1 Installation location Overvoltage category*3 Pollution degree*4

No corrosive gases, flammable gases, less conductive dust 0 to 2000m Inside a control panel*2 or less 2 or less

Equipment class

Class

Number of sweeps
10 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

*1 Do not use or store the I/O module (except for the waterproof module) under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m. Doing so may cause malfunction. When using the I/O module under pressure, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*2 If the environment satisfies the operating ambient temperature, operating ambient humidity and other conditions, the module can be used even outside the control panel.
*3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for the equipment with the rated voltage of 300V or less is 2500V.
*4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used. Pollution degree 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.

For compliance with the EMC Directive, refer to the following: Page 243 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications

I/O module (waterproof module)

Item

Specifications

Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55

Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity

-25 to 75 Compliant with IP67*1

Storage ambient humidity

5 to 95%RH, non-condensing

Vibration resistance

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2

Under intermittent vibration

Frequency
5 to 8.4Hz 8.4 to 150Hz

Constant acceleration
9.8m/

Half amplitude
3.5mm

Under continuous vibration

5 to 8.4Hz 8.4 to 150Hz

4.9m/

1.75mm

Shock resistance

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions)

Operating atmosphere Operating altitude*2 Installation location Overvoltage category*4 Pollution degree*5

No corrosive gases, flammable gases, less conductive dust 0 to 2000m Inside a control panel*3 or less 2 or less

Equipment class

Class

Number of sweeps
10 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

*1 Only when all necessary waterproof connectors and caps have been installed and the indicator cover for the IP address/station number setting switches and the function setting switches has been properly tightened with screws, the module is compliant with IP67. For the tightening torque range of the cover screws for the switches, refer to the following. Page 114 Indicator cover of the I/O module (waterproof module),Page 149 Attaching Waterproof Caps
*2 Do not use or store the I/O module (waterproof module) under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m. Doing so may cause malfunction.
*3 If the environment satisfies the operating ambient temperature, operating ambient humidity and other conditions, the module can be used even outside the control panel.
*4 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for the equipment with the rated voltage of 300V or less is 2500V.
*5 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used. Pollution degree 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.

For compliance with the EMC Directive, refer to the following: Page 243 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications

3.2 Performance Specifications
Input module

NZ2GN2S1-16D DC input module

Item Station type Network topology

NZ2GN2S1-16D

Remote device station

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

6.6mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 17, 18) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Positive common/negative common shared type

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

18-point two-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal*4

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

Terminal block for input Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

16 points 4 points*5

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.15kg

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *4 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more
wires may cause a poor contact. *5 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 220 Input module (16-point module))

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Terminal block for input*1

COM

Non-insulated

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for input
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Terminal number

Signal name

COM

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2S1-32D DC input module

Item

NZ2GN2S1-32D

Station type

Network topology

Number of input points

Rated input voltage

Rated input current

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

ON voltage/ON current

OFF voltage/OFF current

Input resistance

Input response time

OFF ON

ON OFF

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Noise immunity*2

Protection degree Wiring method for common

External interface
Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal*4 Cyclic transmission Module power supply Weight

Communication part Module power supply part I/O part For power supply For I/O Terminal block for module power supply and FG Terminal block for input RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

Intelligent device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 32 points 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 6.0mA TYP. (for 24VDC) 100% 11VDC or more/4mA or more 5VDC or less/1.5mA or less 3.3k 0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)
510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP2X 32 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33, 34) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Positive common/negative common shared type RJ45 connector Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block) 2-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3 Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG) Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal
Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal 32 points 4 points*5 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.20kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

Terminal block for input*1

X10

X11

X12

X13

X14

X15

X16

X17

X18

X19

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

COM

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for input
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal name X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF

Terminal number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Signal name X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X1A X1B X1C X1D X1E X1F COM COM

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-16D DC input module

Item

NZ2GN2B1-16D

Station type

Remote device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

6.6mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 17, 18) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Positive common/negative common shared type

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

I/O part

Applicable wire size

For power supply

18-point two-piece terminal block Tightening torque range for terminal screw (M3 5.2 screw): 0.43 to 0.57Nm Tightening torque range for terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw): 0.68 to 0.92Nm
Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG*4

Terminal block for input

Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

16 points 4 points*5

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.21kg

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *4 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot
be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact. *5 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 220 Input module (16-point module))

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Terminal block for input*1

COM

Non-insulated

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for input
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Terminal number

Signal name

COM

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-32D DC input module

Item

Station type

Network topology

Number of input points

Rated input voltage

Rated input current

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

ON voltage/ON current

OFF voltage/OFF current

Input resistance

Input response time

OFF ON

ON OFF

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

Protection degree Wiring method for common

External interface

Communication part Module power supply part I/O part

Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Cyclic transmission Module power supply Weight

For power supply For I/O Terminal block for module power supply and FG*4 Terminal block for input RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

NZ2GN2B1-32D Intelligent device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 32 points 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 6.0mA TYP. (for 24VDC) 100% 11VDC or more/4mA or more 5VDC or less/1.5mA or less 3.3k 0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)
510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP2X 32 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33, 34) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Positive common/negative common shared type RJ45 connector Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block) 34-point two-piece terminal block Tightening torque range for terminal screw (M3 5.2 screw): 0.43 to 0.57Nm Tightening torque range for terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw): 0.68 to 0.92Nm Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3 Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG) Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal
Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal 32 points 4 points*5 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.31kg

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *4 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot
be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact. *5 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 221 Input module (32-point module))

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

Terminal block for input

X10

X11

X12

X13

X14

X15

X16

X17

X18

X19

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

COM

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for input
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal name X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF

Terminal number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Signal name X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X1A X1B X1C X1D X1E X1F COM COM

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GNCF1-32D DC input module

Item

NZ2GNCF1-32D

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of input points

32 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

6.6mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%*6

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

32 points/common (Common terminal: pin number B1, B2) (1-wire, 40-pin connector type) Positive common/negative common shared type

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

40-pin connector Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3

For I/O

40-pin connector The size depends on the connector plug used (sold separately). ( Page 140 Wiring of 40-pin connector)

Applicable solderless terminal*4

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*5

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.20kg

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *4 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot
be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact. *5 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 221 Input module (32-point module)) *6 For the points for downward installation, horizontal installation (upside down), and upward installation, refer to the derating chart below.

Maximum

number of 16 simultaneous

ON points

(points)

32 points, 45

32 points, 55 28 points, 55

Input voltage
28.8VDC 26.4VDC

0 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature ()

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module

power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Module power

supply

Connector for input*1

B20

B19

B18

B17

B16

B15

B14

B13

B12

B11

B10

A20

A19

A18

A17

A16

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

Signal name
FG 24G +24V
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X1A X1B X1C X1D X1E X1F COM COM

Non-insulated

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the following: terminal block for module power supply and FG, connector for input. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for input

A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

Terminal number

Signal name

Terminal number

Signal name

B20

A20

X10

B19

A19

X11

B18

B17

A18

X12

A17

X13

B16

A16

X14

B15

A15

X15

B14

A14

X16

B13

A13

X17

B12

A12

X18

B11

A11

X19

B10

A10

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

Empty

COM

Empty

COM

Empty

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GNCE3-32D DC input module

Item

NZ2GNCE3-32D

Station type

Network topology

Number of input points

Rated input voltage

Rated input current

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

ON voltage/ON current

OFF voltage/OFF current

Input resistance

Input response time

OFF ON

ON OFF

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Noise immunity*2

Protection degree Wiring method for common

External interface Applicable wire size

Communication part Module power supply part I/O part For power supply

For I/O

Cyclic transmission Module power supply Weight

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

Intelligent device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 32 points 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 6.6mA TYP. (for 24VDC) 100% 11VDC or more/4mA or more 5VDC or less/1.5mA or less 3.3k 0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)
510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP2X 32 points/common (3-wire, sensor connector (e-CON)) Positive common type RJ45 connector One-touch connector for power supply and FG (5 pins, crimping type) Sensor connector (e-CON) (4 pins, crimping type) 0.66 to 0.98 (18 AWG) [Finishing outer diameter: 2.2 to 3.0mm (A6CON-PW5P), 2.0 to 2.3mm (A6CON-PW5P-SOD)] Strand diameter: 0.16mm or longer Insulating coating material: PVC (heat resistant vinyl) Sensor connector (e-CON) The size depends on the connector plug used (sold separately). ( Page 145 Wiring of sensor connector (e-CON)) 32 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.25kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

One-touch connector

for power supply and FG

UNIT POWER CABLE (IN)

Module

power supply

I/O power supply

I/O POWER CABLE (IN)

CON A

Pin No. Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

5 24G (I/O)

Non-insulated

CON B

One-touch connector for power supply and FG

Pin No.

Signal name

UNIT POWER CABLE (OUT)

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

5 4 +24V (I/O)

5 24G (I/O)

I/O POWER CABLE (OUT)

3-wire sensor with an operation switching input (sink output)

Detection circuit

Operation switching input *1
Brown
Blue Black
Brown

CON 1 1 2 3 4
CON 2 1

3-wire sensor (sink output)

Detection circuit

Blue

Black

2-wire sensor (sink output)

Detection circuit

Blue Brown

CON 3 1 2 3 4

CON 32 1 2 3 4

� When an online connector is connected

One-touch connector

for power supply and FG

UNIT POWER CABLE (IN)

Module

power supply

I/O power

supply

I/O POWER CABLE (IN)

CON A

Pin No. Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

One-touch connector for power supply and FG UNIT POWER CABLE (OUT) 1
2 3 4 5
I/O POWER CABLE (OUT)

CON B

Pin No.

Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

Online connector for power supply and FG

*1 The colors of leads correspond to IEC 60947-5-2.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for module power supply and FG
12345 CON A

CON B

Terminal number*1

Signal name

CON A

CON B

FG +24V (UNIT)

24G (UNIT)

+24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

*1 A non-wired connector must be connected to the empty slot of the connector for module power supply and FG.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for input

Terminal number Signal name

CON1 1

(X0)

+24V +V

CON9 1

(X8)

+24V +V

CON17 1

(X10)

+24V +V

CON25 1

(X18)

+24V +V

24G

X10

X18

CON2 1

(X1)

+24V +V

CON10 1

(X9)

+24V +V

CON18 1

(X11)

+24V +V

CON26 1

(X19)

+24V +V

24G

X11

X19

CON3 1

(X2)

+24V +V

CON11 1

(XA)

+24V +V

CON19 1

(X12)

+24V +V

CON27 1

(X1A)

+24V +V

24G

X12

X1A

CON4 1

(X3)

+24V +V

CON12 1

(XB)

+24V +V

CON20 1

(X13)

+24V +V

CON28 1

(X1B)

+24V +V

24G

X13

X1B

CON5 1

(X4)

+24V +V

CON13 1

(XC)

+24V +V

CON21 1

(X14)

+24V +V

CON29 1

(X1C)

+24V +V

24G

X14

X1C

CON6 1

(X5)

+24V +V

CON14 1

(XD)

+24V +V

CON22 1

(X15)

+24V +V

CON30 1

(X1D)

+24V +V

24G

X15

X1D

CON7 1

(X6)

+24V +V

CON15 1

(XE)

+24V +V

CON23 1

(X16)

+24V +V

CON31 1

(X1E)

+24V +V

24G

X16

X1E

CON8 1

(X7)

+24V +V

CON16 1

(XF)

+24V +V

CON24 1

(X17)

+24V +V

CON32 1

(X1F)

+24V +V

24G

X17

X1F

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN12A4-16D DC input module

Item

Station type

Network topology

Number of input points

Rated input voltage

Rated input current

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

ON voltage/ON current

OFF voltage/OFF current

Input resistance

Input response time

OFF ON

ON OFF

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

Protection degree Wiring method for common

Current supplied to external devices

External interface

Communication part

Module power supply part

I/O part

Applicable waterproof connector

For communications For power supply

For I/O

Y-branch connector for I/O

Multicast filter

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points

Module power supply*4

RWr/RWw points Voltage

Current

Weight

NZ2GN12A4-16D Remote device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 16 points 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 7.3mA TYP. (for 24VDC) 100% 11VDC or more/4mA or more 5VDC or less/1.5mA or less 3.0k 0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 10ms)
720VDC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP67 16 points/common (2- to 4-wire, waterproof connector type) Positive common type 0.4A/terminal M12 waterproof connector, 8 pins, female, X-code M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, male, female, L-code M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, female, A-code Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)
Available 16 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 250mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.41kg

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 220 Input module (16-point module)) *4 For a power supply to be connected to the waterproof I/O module (such as the module-and-sensor power supply or the load power supply and external power supply for output part), use the power supply that meets the following condition. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): Product with reinforced insulation from the hazardous potential part (60V or higher)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Moduleand-sensor power supply
Load power supply and external power supply for output part

Power supply connector POWER IN

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

POWER OUT Power supply connector

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

4-wire sensor (sink output)
4

Detection

circuit

3-wire sensor (sink output)
4

Detection

circuit

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)
Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

Non-insulated
3

Detection circuit

2-wire sensor (sink output)
Power supply connectors
FE

(1) (2)

(4) (3)

4 2 1 3 5
(4) (3)

FE
(1) (2)

Pin number

M12 connector, male

(1)

(IN)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

Pin number

M12 connector, female (1)

(OUT)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for input

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name

Pin number

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

Signal name +24V (UNIT) X9 24G (UNIT) X8 Empty +24V (UNIT) XB 24G (UNIT) XA Empty +24V (UNIT) XD 24G (UNIT) XC Empty +24V (UNIT) XF 24G (UNIT) XE Empty

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN12A4-16DE DC input module

Item

NZ2GN12A4-16DE

Station type

Remote device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

7.3mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.0k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 10ms)

Withstand voltage

720VDC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP67

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (2- to 4-wire, waterproof connector type) Negative common type

Current supplied to external devices

0.4A/terminal

External interface

Communication part

M12 waterproof connector, 8 pins, female, X-code

Module power supply part M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, male, female, L-code

I/O part

M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, female, A-code

Applicable waterproof connector

For communications For power supply

Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)

For I/O

Y-branch connector for I/O

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission Module power supply*4

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage

16 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

250mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.41kg

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 220 Input module (16-point module)) *4 For a power supply to be connected to the waterproof I/O module (such as the module-and-sensor power supply or the load power supply and external power supply for output part), use the power supply that meets the following condition. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): Product with reinforced insulation from the hazardous potential part (60V or higher)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Moduleand-sensor power supply
Load power supply and external power supply for output part

Power supply connector POWER IN

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

POWER OUT Power supply connector

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

4-wire sensor (source output)
4

Detection

circuit

3-wire sensor (source output)
4

2
Detection

circuit

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)
Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

Detection circuit
2-wire sensor (source output)
Power supply connectors
FE

(1) (2)

(4) (3)

4 2 1 3 5
(4) (3)

FE
(1) (2)

Pin number

M12 connector, male

(1)

(IN)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

Pin number

M12 connector, female (1)

(OUT)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Non-insulated
Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for input

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name

Pin number

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

24G (UNIT)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

3
Signal name +24V (UNIT) X9 24G (UNIT) X8 Empty +24V (UNIT) XB 24G (UNIT) XA Empty +24V (UNIT) XD 24G (UNIT) XC Empty +24V (UNIT) XF 24G (UNIT) XE Empty

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Output module

NZ2GN2S1-16T transistor output module

Item Station type Network topology Number of output points Rated load voltage Max. load current Maximum inrush current Leakage current at OFF Max. voltage drop at ON Output response time
Surge suppressor External power supply for output part
Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity

OFF ON ON OFF
Voltage Current

Protection degree Wiring method for common

Protection function
External interface
Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal*2
Multicast filter Cyclic transmission Module power supply Weight

Overload protection function Overheat protection function Communication part Module power supply part I/O part For power supply For I/O Terminal block for module power supply and FG Terminal block for output
RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

NZ2GN2S1-16T Remote device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 16 points 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 0.5A/point, 4A/common Current is limited by the overload protection function. 0.1mA or less 0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 0.1ms or less 0.8ms or less (resistive load) Zener diode 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 40mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included. 510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP2X 16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 18) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Sink type Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point. Activated to each point.
RJ45 connector Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)
18-point two-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*1 Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG) Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal
Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal Available 16 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.15kg

*1 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *2 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more
wires may cause a poor contact. *3 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 222 Output module (16-point module))

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

Terminal block for output*1
Load 1

External power supply 13

for the output part

Load

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF CTL+ COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

Load power supply
Load

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)

CTL+

COM-

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Signal name Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF CTL+ COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2S1-32T transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2S1-32T

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of output points

32 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 5A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.1ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 40mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

32 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 34) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Sink type

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

2-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*1

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal*2

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

Terminal block for output Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*3

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

120mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.18kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Terminal block for output*1
Load 1

External power supply 29

for the output part

Load

Load power supply
Load
33 34

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F CTL+ COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)
CTL+ COM-

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number

Signal name

Terminal number

Signal name

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

CTL+

COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-16T transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2B1-16T

Station type Network topology Number of output points

Remote device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 16 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time
Surge suppressor External power supply for output part

OFF ON ON OFF
Voltage Current

0.1ms or less 0.8ms or less (resistive load) Zener diode 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 40mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground
10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree Wiring method for common

IP2X
16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 18) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Sink type

Protection function

Overload protection function
Overheat protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point.
Activated to each point.

External interface
Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

I/O part For power supply

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG)

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG*2

Terminal block for output Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

16 points 4 points*3

Module power supply Weight

Voltage Current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.21kg

*1 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *2 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot
be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact. *3 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 222 Output module (16-point module))

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

Terminal block for output*1
Load 1

External power supply 13

for the output part

Load

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF CTL+ COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

Load power supply
Load

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)

CTL+

COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Signal name Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF CTL+ COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-32T transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2B1-32T

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of output points

32 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 5A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.1ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 40mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

32 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 34) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Sink type

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

I/O part

Applicable wire size

For power supply

34-point two-piece terminal block Tightening torque range for terminal screw (M3 5.2 screw): 0.43 to 0.57Nm Tightening torque range for terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw): 0.68 to 0.92Nm
Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*1

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG*2

Terminal block for output Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*3

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

120mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.29kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Terminal block
for output
Load 1

External power supply 29

for the output part

Load

Load power supply
Load
33 34

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F CTL+ COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)
CTL+ COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number

Signal name

Terminal number

Signal name

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

CTL+

COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GNCF1-32T transistor output module

Item

NZ2GNCF1-32T

Station type Network topology Number of output points Rated load voltage Max. load current Maximum inrush current Leakage current at OFF Max. voltage drop at ON Output response time
Surge suppressor External power supply for output part
Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity

OFF ON ON OFF
Voltage Current

Protection degree Wiring method for common

Protection function External interface Applicable wire size

Overload protection function Overheat protection function Communication part Module power supply part I/O part For power supply For I/O

Applicable solderless terminal*2 Cyclic transmission
Module power supply
Weight

Terminal block for module power supply and FG RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

Intelligent device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 32 points 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 0.1A/point, 3.2A/common Current is limited by the overload protection function. 0.1mA or less 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A, 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 0.1ms or less 0.8ms or less (resistive load) Zener diode 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 40mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included. 510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP2X 32 points/common (Common terminal: pin number A1, A2) (1-wire, 40-pin connector type) Sink type Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1 to 3A/point Activated to each point. Activated to each point.
RJ45 connector Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block) 40-pin connector Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*1 40-pin connector The size depends on the connector plug used (sold separately). ( Page 140 Wiring of 40-pin connector) Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal
32 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 120mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.16kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module

power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply

Connector for

output*1 Load

B20

B19

B18

B17

B16

B15

B14

B13

B12

B11

B10

A20

Y10

A19

Y11

A18

Y12

A17

Y13

A16

Y14

A15

Y15

A14

Y16

A13

Y17

A12

Y18

A11

Y19

A10

Y1A

Y1B

External power supply A8

Y1C

for the output part

Y1D

Load

Y1E

Y1F

B1, 2

CTL+

A1, 2

COM-

Load power supply

Constant-voltage circuit

Load

External power supply for the output part

and load power supply (common)

B1, 2 A1, 2

CTL+ COM-

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the following: terminal block for module power supply and FG, connector for output. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for output
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

Terminal number B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

Signal name Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF Empty Empty CTL+ CTL+

Terminal number A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

Signal name Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F Empty Empty COMCOM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN12A2-16T transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN12A2-16T

Station type

Remote device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of output points

16 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

4A/point (Y0 to Y3)*1, 2A/point (Y4 to YF), 12A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.25VDC (TYP.) 2A, 0.5VDC (MAX.) 2A, 0.5VDC (TYP.) 4A, 0.1VDC (MAX.) 4A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for output part*3

Voltage Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 25mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage

720VDC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP67

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (2-wire, waterproof connector type) Sink type

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 9A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

External interface

Communication part

M12 waterproof connector, 8 pins, female, X-code

Module power supply part M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, male, female, L-code

I/O part

M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, female, A-code

Applicable waterproof connector

For communications For power supply

Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)

For I/O

Y-branch connector for I/O

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission Module power supply*3

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage

16 points 4 points*2 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.42kg

*1 Make sure that the total amount of output current that flows through one connector is 4A or less. *2 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 222 Output module (16-point module)) *3 For a power supply to be connected to the waterproof I/O module (such as the module-and-sensor power supply or the load power supply and external power supply for output part), use the power supply that meets the following condition. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): Product with reinforced insulation from the hazardous potential part (60V or higher)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Derating chart
12

12A/common at 40

8
Max. load current (common) (A/common)

8A/common at 55

Ambient temperature ()

: Module-and-sensor power supply current, 8A : Module-and-sensor power supply current, 6A The module-and-sensor power supply current is 6A when the ambient temperature is 40 or higher.

External wiring

Moduleand-sensor power supply
Load power supply and external power supply for output part

Power supply connector POWER IN

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

POWER OUT Power supply connector

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

Load

1 3

Insulated
Constantvoltage circuit

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Power supply connectors

(1) (2)

(4) (3)

(1) (2)

Pin number

M12 connector, male

(1)

(IN)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Connector for output

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

Pin number

M12 connector, female (1)

(OUT)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name

+24V (LOAD)

24G (LOAD)

24G (UNIT)

+24V (UNIT)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name

Pin number

+24V (LOAD)

(1)

(2)

Empty

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (LOAD)

(1)

(2)

Empty

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (LOAD)

(1)

(2)

Empty

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

+24V (LOAD)

(1)

(2)

Empty

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) Y9 Empty Y8 Empty +24V (LOAD) YB Empty YA Empty +24V (LOAD) YD Empty YC Empty +24V (LOAD) YF Empty YE Empty

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2S1-16TE transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2S1-16TE

Station type

Remote device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of output points

16 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.5VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.8VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

1.0ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 80mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 17) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Source type

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

18-point two-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*1

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal*2

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

Terminal block for output Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points

16 points

RWr/RWw points

4 points*3

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.15kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

Terminal block

for output*1

Load

COM+

CTL-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)
*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Signal name Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF COM+ CTL-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2S1-32TE transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2S1-32TE

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of output points

32 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 5A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.5VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.8VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

1.0ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 80mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

32 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Source type

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

2-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*1

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal*2

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

Terminal block for output Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*3

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

120mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.18kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Terminal block

for output*1

Load

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Load

Y1E Y1F

COM+

CTL-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number

Signal name

Terminal number

Signal name

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

COM+

CTL-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-16TE transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2B1-16TE

Station type Network topology Number of output points

Remote device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 16 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.5VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.8VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time
Surge suppressor External power supply for output part

OFF ON ON OFF
Voltage Current

0.5ms or less 1.0ms or less (resistive load) Zener diode 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 80mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity

Protection degree Wiring method for common

IP2X
16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 17) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Source type

Protection function

Overload protection function
Overheat protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5A or more/point Activated to each point.
Activated to each point.

External interface
Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

I/O part For power supply

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG)

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG*2

Terminal block for output Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

16 points 4 points*3

Module power supply Weight

Voltage Current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.21kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

Terminal block

for output*1

Load

COM+

CTL-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)
*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Signal name Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF COM+ CTL-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-32TE transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2B1-32TE

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Number of output points

32 points

Rated load voltage

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 5A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.5VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.8VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

1.0ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 80mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

Wiring method for common

32 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Source type

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

I/O part

Applicable wire size

For power supply

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG*2

Terminal block for output Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*3

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

120mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.29kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Terminal block

for output

Load

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Load

Y1E Y1F

COM+

CTL-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number

Signal name

Terminal number

Signal name

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

COM+

CTL-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN12A2-16TE transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN12A2-16TE

Station type Network topology Number of output points Rated load voltage Max. load current Maximum inrush current Leakage current at OFF Max. voltage drop at ON Output response time
Surge suppressor External power supply for output part*3
Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity

OFF ON ON OFF
Voltage Current

Protection degree Wiring method for common

Protection function
External interface
Applicable waterproof connector
Multicast filter Cyclic transmission Module power supply*3 Weight

Overload protection function Overheat protection function Communication part Module power supply part I/O part For communications For power supply For I/O Y-branch connector for I/O
RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

Remote device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 16 points 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 4A/point (Y0 to Y3)*1, 2A/point (Y4 to YF), 12A/common Current is limited by the overload protection function. 0.1mA or less 0.3VDC (TYP.) 2A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 2A, 0.6VDC (TYP.) 4A, 1.2VDC (MAX.) 4A 0.5ms or less 1.0ms or less (resistive load) Zener diode 12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 45mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included. 720VDC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP67 16 points/common (2-wire, waterproof connector type) Source type Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 5.2A or more/point Activated to each point. Activated to each point.
M12 waterproof connector, 8 pins, female, X-code M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, male, female, L-code M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, female, A-code Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)
Available 16 points 4 points*2 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.42kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Derating chart
12

12A/common at 40

8
Max. load current (common) (A/common)

8A/common at 55

Ambient temperature ()

: Module-and-sensor power supply current, 8A : Module-and-sensor power supply current, 6A The module-and-sensor power supply current is 6A when the ambient temperature is 40 or higher.
External wiring

Moduleand-sensor power supply
Load power supply and external power supply for output part

Power supply connector POWER IN

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

POWER OUT Power supply connector

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

Load

1 3

3
Insulated
Constantvoltage circuit

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Power supply connectors
FE

(1) (2)

(4) (3)

FE
(1) (2)

Pin number

M12 connector, male

(1)

(IN)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Connector for output

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

Pin number

M12 connector, female (1)

(OUT)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name

Pin number

Empty

(1)

(2)

24V (LOAD)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

Empty

(1)

(2)

24V (LOAD)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

Empty

(1)

(2)

24V (LOAD)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

Empty

(1)

(2)

24V (LOAD)

(3)

(4)

Empty

(5)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG
Signal name Empty Y9 24V (LOAD) Y8 Empty Empty YB 24V (LOAD) YA Empty Empty YD 24V (LOAD) YC Empty Empty YF 24V (LOAD) YE Empty

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

I/O combined module

NZ2GN2S1-32DT DC input/transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2S1-32DT

Input specifications

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage Rated input current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

6.0mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Positive common type

Output specifications

Number of output points

16 points

Rated load voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.1ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 25mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 34) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Sink type

Common specifications

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

2-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal*4

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

I/O terminal block

Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*5

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Item

NZ2GN2S1-32DT

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.20kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

I/O terminal block*1

21
Load
22

Load

Load power supply
External power supply for the output part

X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F COM+ COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

Load
33 34

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)
COM+ COM-

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

I/O terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal name X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF

Terminal number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Signal name Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F COM+ COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-32DT DC input/transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2B1-32DT

Input specifications

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

6.0mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Positive common type

Output specifications

Number of output points

16 points

Rated load voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.1ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 25mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 34) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Sink type

Common specifications

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

I/O part

Applicable wire size

For power supply

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG*4

I/O terminal block

Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*5

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.31kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *4 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot
be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact. *5 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 225 I/O combined module (32point module))

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

Module power

supply
3

I/O terminal block

21
Load
22

Load

Load power supply
External power supply for the output part

X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F COM+ COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

Load
33 34

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)
COM+ COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

I/O terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal name X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF

Terminal number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Signal name Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F COM+ COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GNCE3-32DT DC input/transistor output module

Item

NZ2GNCE3-32DT

Input specifications

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

6.6mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (3-wire, sensor connector (e-CON) type) Positive common type

Output specifications

Number of output points

16 points

Rated load voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.1ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 25mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 to 3.5A/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (3-wire, sensor connector (e-CON) type) Sink type

Common specifications

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part One-touch connector for power supply and FG (5 pins, crimping type)

I/O part

Sensor connector (e-CON) (4 pins, crimping type)

Applicable wire size

For power supply

0.66 to 0.98 (18 AWG) [Finishing outer diameter: 2.2 to 3.0mm (A6CON-PW5P), 2.0 to 2.3mm (A6CON-PW5P-SOD)] Strand diameter: 0.16mm or longer Insulating coating material: PVC (heat resistant vinyl)

For I/O

Sensor connector (e-CON) The size depends on the connector plug used (sold separately). ( Page 145 Wiring of sensor connector (e-CON))

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*3

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.25kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

One-touch connector for power supply and FG

UNIT POWER CABLE (IN)

Module

power supply

I/O power supply

I/O POWER CABLE (IN)

One-touch connector for power supply and FG
UNIT POWER CABLE (OUT) 1
2 3 4 5

I/O POWER CABLE (OUT)

Operation switching input *1

3-wire sensor with an operation switching input (sink output)

Detection circuit

Brown
Blue Black

CON A

Pin No. Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

CON B

Pin No.

Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

CON 1 1 2 3 4

Non-insulated

Load

CON 16 1 2 3 4
CON 17 1 2 3 4

Constantvoltage circuit

CON 32 1

Load

� When an online connector is connected

One-touch connector for power supply and FG

UNIT POWER CABLE (IN)

Module

power supply

I/O power

supply

I/O POWER CABLE (IN)

CON A

Pin No.

Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

One-touch connector for power supply and FG
UNIT POWER CABLE (OUT) 1
2 3 4 5
I/O POWER CABLE (OUT)

CON B

Pin No.

Signal name

2 +24V (UNIT)

3 24G (UNIT)

4 +24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

Online connector for power supply and FG

*1 The colors of leads correspond to IEC 60947-5-2.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for module power supply and FG
12345 CON A

CON B

Terminal number*1

Signal name

CON A

CON B

+24V (UNIT)

24G (UNIT)

+24V (I/O)

24G (I/O)

*1 A non-wired connector must be connected to the empty slot of the connector for module power supply and FG.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Connector for I/O

Terminal number Signal name

CON1 1

(X0)

+24V +V

CON9 1

(X8)

+24V +V

CON17 1

(Y10)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y10

CON2 1

(X1)

+24V +V

CON10 1

(X9)

+24V +V

CON18 1

(Y11)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y11

CON3 1

(X2)

+24V +V

CON11 1

(XA)

+24V +V

CON19 1

(Y12)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y12

CON4 1

(X3)

+24V +V

CON12 1

(XB)

+24V +V

CON20 1

(Y13)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y13

CON5 1

(X4)

+24V +V

CON13 1

(XC)

+24V +V

CON21 1

(Y14)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y14

CON6 1

(X5)

+24V +V

CON14 1

(XD)

+24V +V

CON22 1

(Y15)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y15

CON7 1

(X6)

+24V +V

CON15 1

(XE)

+24V +V

CON23 1

(Y16)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y16

CON8 1

(X7)

+24V +V

CON16 1

(XF)

+24V +V

CON24 1

(Y17)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y17

*1 All the pin 2 of CON17 to CON32 cannot be used because they are internally connected.

Terminal number Signal name

CON25 1

(Y18)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y18

CON26 1

(Y19)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y19

CON27 1

(Y1A)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y1A

CON28 1

(Y1B)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y1B

CON29 1

(Y1C)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y1C

CON30 1

(Y1D)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y1D

CON31 1

(Y1E)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y1E

CON32 1

(Y1F)

+24V NC*1

24G

Y1F

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN12A42-16DT DC input/transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN12A42-16DT

Input specifications

Number of input points

8 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

7.3mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.0k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 10ms)

Wiring method for common

8 points/common (2- to 4-wire, waterproof connector type) Positive common type

Current supplied to external devices

0.4A/terminal

Output specifications

Number of output points

8 points

Rated load voltage Max. load current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 4A/point (Y8 to YB)*2, 2A/point (YC to YF), 12A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.25VDC (TYP.) 2A, 0.5VDC (MAX.) 2A, 0.5VDC (TYP.) 4A, 0.1VDC (MAX.) 4A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

0.8ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for output part*4

Voltage Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 20mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 9A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

Wiring method for common

8 points/common (2-wire, waterproof connector type) Sink type

Common specifications

Station type

Remote device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Withstand voltage

720VDC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP67

External interface

Communication part

M12 waterproof connector, 8 pins, female, X-code

Module power supply part M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, male, female, L-code

I/O part

M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, female, A-code

Applicable waterproof connector

For communications For power supply

Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)

For I/O

Y-branch connector for I/O

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission Module power supply*4

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage

16 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

160mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.42kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 Make sure that the total amount of output current that flows through one connector is 4A or less. *3 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 224 I/O combined module (16point module)) *4 For a power supply to be connected to the waterproof I/O module (such as the module-and-sensor power supply or the load power supply and external power supply for output part), use the power supply that meets the following condition. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): Product with reinforced insulation from the hazardous potential part (60V or higher)
Derating chart
12A/common at 40
12
8A/common at 55
8 Max. load current (common) (A/common)

Ambient temperature ()

: Module-and-sensor power supply current, 8A : Module-and-sensor power supply current, 6A The module-and-sensor power supply current is 6A when the ambient temperature is 40 or higher.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Moduleand-sensor power supply
Load power supply and external power supply for output part

Power supply connector POWER IN

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

POWER OUT Power supply connector

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

4-wire sensor (sink output)
4

Detection

circuit

3-wire sensor (sink output)
4

2
Detection

circuit

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)
Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

Detection circuit
2-wire sensor (sink output)

4 2 1 3 5

Load

Constantvoltage circuit

Insulated
3

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Power supply connectors
FE

(1) (2)

(4) (3)

FE
(1) (2)

Pin number

M12 connector, male

(1)

(IN)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Connector for I/O

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

Connector for input

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

Pin number

M12 connector, female (1)

(OUT)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name +24V (UNIT) X1 24G (UNIT) X0 Empty +24V (UNIT) X3 24G (UNIT) X2 Empty +24V (UNIT) X5 24G (UNIT) X4 Empty +24V (UNIT) X7 24G (UNIT) X6 Empty

Connector for output

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG
Signal name +24V (LOAD) Y9 Empty Y8 Empty +24V (LOAD) YB Empty YA Empty +24V (LOAD) YD Empty YC Empty +24V (LOAD) YF Empty YE Empty

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2S1-32DTE DC input/transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN2S1-32DTE

Input specifications

Number of input points

16 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

6.0mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.3k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 34) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Negative common type

Output specifications

Number of output points

16 points

Rated load voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Max. load current

0.5A/point, 4A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.5VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.8VDC (MAX.) 0.5A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

1.0ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 45mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

Wiring method for common

16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33) (1-wire, spring clamp terminal block type) Source type

Common specifications

Station type

Intelligent device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Withstand voltage

510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP2X

External interface

Communication part

RJ45 connector

Module power supply part Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block)

Applicable wire size

I/O part For power supply

2-piece spring clamp terminal block Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3

For I/O

Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG)

Applicable solderless terminal*4

Terminal block for module Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal power supply and FG

I/O terminal block

Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal

Cyclic transmission

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points

32 points 4 points*5

Module power supply

Voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.20kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

Terminal block for module power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

I/O terminal block*1
Load Load

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

COM+

COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)

*1 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening. Multiple wires cannot be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

I/O terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number

Signal name

Terminal number

Signal name

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

COM+

COM-

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN2B1-32DTE DC input/transistor output module

Item

Input specifications

Number of input points

Rated input voltage

Rated input current

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

ON voltage/ON current

OFF voltage/OFF current

Input resistance

Input response time

OFF ON

ON OFF

Wiring method for common

Output specifications

Number of output points

Rated load voltage

Max. load current

Maximum inrush current

Leakage current at OFF

Max. voltage drop at ON

Output response time

OFF ON

ON OFF

Surge suppressor

External power supply for Voltage

output part

Current

Protection function

Overload protection function

Overheat protection function

Wiring method for common

Common specifications Station type Network topology Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity*2

Protection degree External interface

Communication part Module power supply part I/O part

Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Cyclic transmission Module power supply Weight

For power supply For I/O Terminal block for module power supply and FG*4 I/O terminal block RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage Current

NZ2GN2B1-32DTE
16 points 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 6.0mA TYP. (for 24VDC) 100% 11VDC or more/4mA or more 5VDC or less/1.5mA or less 3.3k 0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 1ms)
16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 34) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Negative common type
16 points 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 0.5A/point, 4A/common Current is limited by the overload protection function. 0.1mA or less 0.5VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.8VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 0.5ms or less 1.0ms or less (resistive load) Zener diode 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 45mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included. Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5A or more/point Activated to each point. Activated to each point.
16 points/common (Common terminal: terminal number 33) (1-wire, screw terminal block type) Source type
Intelligent device station Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology 510VAC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground 10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester) Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition) IP2X RJ45 connector Terminal block for module power supply and FG (2-piece spring clamp terminal block) 34-point two-piece terminal block Tightening torque range for terminal screw (M3 5.2 screw): 0.43 to 0.57Nm Tightening torque range for terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw): 0.68 to 0.92Nm Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (22 to 16 AWG), terminal slot size: 2.4mm 1.5mm*3 Stranded wire: 0.3 to 2.0 (22 to 14 AWG) Page 124 Applicable solderless terminal
Page 138 Applicable solderless terminal 32 points 4 points*5 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC) 110mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 0.31kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

*1 If the input response time is set to "0ms", the actual input response time is 80s at OFF ON, and 160s at ON OFF. *2 It is the noise immunity of when the input response time setting value is other than "0ms". Note that the module is easily affected by
noise if "0ms" is set. *3 Use bar solderless terminals for wiring. *4 Only one wire can be inserted into a wire insertion opening for the terminal block for module power supply and FG. Multiple wires cannot
be connected to a terminal. Connecting two or more wires may cause a poor contact. *5 This value indicates the number of points set by default when the module is dragged and dropped to the network map in the CC IE Field
Configuration window. According to the function used, set an appropriate number of points. ( Page 225 I/O combined module (32point module))

External wiring

Terminal block for module

power supply and FG*1

UNIT POWER CABLE
Module power supply

Pin
No. 1
1 2
2 3
3

Signal name
FG 24G +24V

Non-insulated

I/O terminal block
Load Load

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y19

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

COM+

COM-

Constantvoltage circuit

External power supply for the output part and load power supply (common)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

I/O terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

Terminal number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal name X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF

Terminal number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Signal name Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F COM+ COM-

100

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

NZ2GN12A42-16DTE DC input/transistor output module

Item

NZ2GN12A42-16DTE

Input specifications

Number of input points

8 points

Rated input voltage

24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Rated input current

7.3mA TYP. (for 24VDC)

Maximum number of simultaneous input points

100%

ON voltage/ON current

11VDC or more/4mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current

5VDC or less/1.5mA or less

Input resistance Input response time

OFF ON ON OFF

3.0k
0ms*1/0.2ms/1ms/1.5ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Factory default: 10ms)

Wiring method for common

8 points/common (2- to 4-wire, waterproof connector type) Negative common type

Current supplied to external devices

0.4A/terminal

Output specifications

Number of output points

8 points

Rated load voltage Max. load current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 4A/point (Y8 to YB)*2, 2A/point (YC to YF), 12A/common

Maximum inrush current

Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF

0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON

0.3VDC (TYP.) 2A, 0.6VDC (MAX.) 2A, 0.6VDC (TYP.) 4A, 1.2VDC (MAX.) 4A

Output response time

OFF ON

0.5ms or less

ON OFF

1.0ms or less (resistive load)

Surge suppressor

Zener diode

External power supply for output part*4

Voltage Current

12/24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8VDC) 30mA or less (TYP. 24VDC per common) External load current is not included.

Protection function

Overload protection function

Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 5.2A or more/point Activated to each point.

Overheat protection function

Activated to each point.

Wiring method for common

8 points/common (2-wire, waterproof connector type) Source type

Common specifications

Station type

Remote device station

Network topology

Line topology, star topology, mixture of star topology and line topology, ring topology

Withstand voltage

720VDC for 1 minute between all DC external terminals and ground

Insulation resistance

10M or higher between all DC external terminals and ground (500VDC insulation resistance tester)

Noise immunity

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)

Protection degree

IP67

External interface

Communication part

M12 waterproof connector, 8 pins, female, X-code

Module power supply part M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, male, female, L-code

I/O part

M12 waterproof connector, 5 pins, female, A-code

Applicable waterproof connector

For communications For power supply

Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)

For I/O

Y-branch connector for I/O

Multicast filter

Available

Cyclic transmission Module power supply*4

RX/RY points RWr/RWw points Voltage

16 points 4 points*3 24VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 20.4 to 28.8VDC)

Current

160mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)

Weight

0.42kg

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

101

Ambient temperature ()

: Module-and-sensor power supply current, 8A : Module-and-sensor power supply current, 6A The module-and-sensor power supply current is 6A when the ambient temperature is 40 or higher.

102

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

External wiring

Moduleand-sensor power supply
Load power supply and external power supply for output part

Power supply connector POWER IN

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

POWER OUT Power supply connector

Pin No. 4
4 3
3 FE FE 1
1 2
2

4-wire sensor (source output)
4

Detection

circuit

3-wire sensor (source output)
4

2
Detection

circuit

Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)
Signal name
+24V (UNIT) 24G (UNIT)
FG +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD)

Detection

circuit

5 2-wire sensor (source output)

Load

Constantvoltage circuit

Insulated
3

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

103

Power supply connectors
FE

(1) (2)

(4) (3)

FE
(1) (2)

Pin number

M12 connector, male

(1)

(IN)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Connector for I/O

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG

Pin number

M12 connector, female (1)

(OUT)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Connector for input

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name +24V (UNIT) X1 24G (UNIT) X0 Empty +24V (UNIT) X3 24G (UNIT) X2 Empty +24V (UNIT) X5 24G (UNIT) X4 Empty +24V (UNIT) X7 24G (UNIT) X6 Empty

Connector for output

Pin number

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Signal name +24V (LOAD) 24G (LOAD) 24G (UNIT) +24V (UNIT) FG
Signal name Empty Y9 24G (LOAD) Y8 Empty Empty YB 24G (LOAD) YA Empty Empty YD 24G (LOAD) YC Empty Empty YF 24G (LOAD) YE Empty

104

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3.3 Function List

This section lists the functions of I/O modules. : Available, : Not available

Item

Description

Function availability

Reference

Input

Output

I/O

module

combined

Input response time setting Prevents an incorrect input due to noise by setting

module

Page 152

function

the response time required for the module to

Input Response

recognize an actual input as the X signal.

Time Setting

Function

Output HOLD/CLEAR

Sets whether to hold or clear the last output value

setting function

when the I/O module is disconnected from data link,

when the CPU module operating status is STOP, or

when the CPU module operation is suspended by an

error.

Page 153 Output HOLD/ CLEAR Setting Function

CC-Link IE Field Network

Performs I/O with a synchronization cycle of the

synchronous

master station that supports the CC-Link IE Field

communication function

Network synchronous communication function.

Page 154 CCLink IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

Output ON/OFF information Checks whether the output has been turned on or

hold function

off.

Page 167 Output ON/OFF Information Hold Function

Fast link-up function

Shortens the time taken for data link establishment

with the master station at power-on.

Page 163 Fast Link-Up Function

Protection function

The transistor output module and the I/O combined

module (transistor output part) have the overload

protection function and the overheat protection

function.

Page 168 Protection Function

Module power supply

Detects a voltage drop of the module power supply.

voltage drop detection

function

Page 169 Module Power Supply Voltage Drop Detection Function

External power supply

Monitors the ON/OFF status of the external power

monitoring function

supply.

Page 169 External Power Supply Monitoring Function

Firmware update function Updates the firmware of the I/O module via CC-Link

IE TSN.

Page 170 Firmware Update Function

105 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Function List

4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION
This chapter describes the procedures before operation.
1. Setting the IP address/station number setting switches
Set the fourth octet of IP address of I/O module. Set the station number of the I/O module. Page 115 Setting the IP address/station number setting switches
2. Function setting switch setting
Set functions of the I/O module. To operate the module in CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode, set function setting switch 1 to ON. In the factory default switch state, the I/O module also operates with the following settings. Change the switch status as necessary. � Input response time setting: 1ms (I/O module (except for waterproof module)), 10ms (I/O module (waterproof module)) � Output HOLD/CLEAR setting: CLEAR � CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication mode setting function: Synchronous X/Y control mode � Fast link-up function: Disabled Page 117 Function setting switch setting
3. Connection
Mount the I/O modules (except for waterproof modules) on a DIN rail. Or fix the I/O modules (waterproof modules). Page 122 Mounting the I/O modules (except for waterproof module) on a DIN rail Page 123 Fixing the I/O module (waterproof module)
4. Wiring
Wire the power supply, Ethernet cables, and external devices to the I/O modules. Page 124 Wiring of Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG Page 130 Wiring the I/O Module (Waterproof Module) to the Power Supply Page 131 Wiring of Ethernet Cable Page 134 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device
5. Parameter setting
Set the network parameters. Page 150 Network Configuration Setting
6. Programming
Create a program.
To replace the I/O module, follow the procedure described below: � Power off the I/O module and remove it. � Prepare a new I/O module and perform the procedure from step 1 to step 4. At this time, the settings of the
IP address/station number setting switches and function setting switch must be the same as the settings for I/O module before replacement. � Check that the RUN LED and DATA LINK LED of I/O module are on and the ERR. LED is off before restarting control operation.
106 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

MEMO
4
107 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes system configuration using an I/O module. For CC-Link IE Field Network configuration, refer to the following. User's manual for the master/local module used
5.1 Applicable Systems

Applicable master station

When using an I/O module, use the following products as a master station.

Model RJ71GF11-T2 RJ71EN71 RnENCPU RD77GF32, RD77GF16, RD77GF8, RD77GF4 QJ71GF11-T2 LJ71GF11-T2 QD77GF8, QD77GF4 QD77GF16

First five digits of serial number No restriction
The first five digits of the serial number are "14102" or later. The first five digits of the serial number are "17101" or later. The first five digits of the serial number are "17102" or later.

The above information of "applicable master station" is information at the time of this manual's issuance. For the latest information, refer to the CC-Link Partner Association's homepage. www.cc-link.org

Compatible software version
For the compatible software version, always keep the engineering tool of the master station up to date. The compatible engineering tool is GX Works3 or GX Works2. When the latest software is necessary, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Compatible software package

Diagnosing the I/O module requires GX Works3 or GX Works2. Install GX Works3 or GX Works2 with the following version in accordance with the I/O module used.

Model
NZ2GN2S1-32D, NZ2GN2B1-32D, NZ2GN2S1-32T, NZ2GN2B1-32T, NZ2GN2S1-32TE, NZ2GN2B1-32TE, NZ2GN2S1-32DT, NZ2GN2B1-32DT, NZ2GN2S1-32DTE, NZ2GN2B1-32DTE NZ2GNCF1-32D, NZ2GNCE3-32D, NZ2GNCF1-32T, NZ2GNCE3-32DT NZ2GN2S1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16DE, NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN2S1-16TE, NZ2GN2B1-16TE, NZ2GN12A2-16TE, NZ2GN12A42-16DT, NZ2GN12A42-16DTE

Software version GX Works3 1.060N or later
1.065T or later 1.075D or later

GX Works2 1.590Q or later
1.595V or later 1.605F or later

108 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5.1 Applicable Systems

Applicable profile

A profile is required to use the I/O module in the CC IE Field Configuration setting. The following table shows the applicable profile versions.

Model

Firmware version

NZ2GN2S1-32D, NZ2GN2B1-32D, NZ2GN2S1-32T, NZ2GN2B1-32T, NZ2GN2S1-32TE, NZ2GN2B1-32TE, NZ2GN2S1-32DT, NZ2GN2B1-32DT, NZ2GN2S1-32DTE, NZ2GN2B1-32DTE
NZ2GNCF1-32D, NZ2GNCE3-32D, NZ2GNCF1-32T, NZ2GNCE3-32DT
NZ2GN2S1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16DE, NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN2S1-16TE, NZ2GN2B1-16TE, NZ2GN12A2-16TE, NZ2GN12A42-16DT, NZ2GN12A42-16DTE

"02" or later
"02" or later "05" or later

Version "00" or later
"00" or later "00" or later

When the latest profile of the I/O module is necessary, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

The profile is a setting file that stores information required for the start-up, operation, and maintenance of devices supporting

the CC-Link family.

A module is added to "Module List" of the CC IE Field Configuration window by profile registration to the engineering tool of the master station.

For the profile registration, refer to the following.

GX Works3 Operating Manual

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

Ethernet cable
For the specifications of the Ethernet cable, refer to the following. � When using the I/O modules (except for waterproof modules): User's manual for the master station used � When using the I/O modules (waterproof modules): Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O
Module (Waterproof Module)

Hub
For compatible hubs, refer to the following. User's manual for the master/local module used

109 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5.1 Applicable Systems

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

This chapter describes the installation and wiring of the I/O module.
6.1 Before Using the I/O Modules
Input modules

Precautions common to all input modules
Number of simultaneous ON points
The number of input points that can be turned on at the same time varies depending on the input voltage and ambient temperature. Refer to the maximum number of simultaneous input points of the specifications of each input module. ( Page 21 Input module, Page 79 I/O combined module)

Precautions when using the DC input module

Measures against back EMF
When connecting an inductive load, connect a diode in parallel with the load. Use the diode that satisfies the following conditions: � A reverse breakdown voltage is ten times as high as the circuit voltage or more. � A forward current is twice as high as the load current or more.

Positive common type

Negative common type

IN
Inductive load
COM

Input response time
For the input module and I/O combined module, the input response time can be set. ( Page 152 Input Response Time Setting Function) In a circumstance where noise tends to occur, the noise in an input can be reduced by making the input response time longer, which makes the input status more stable. The factory default input response time is as follows. � I/O module (except for waterproof module): 1ms � I/O module (waterproof module): 10ms

110

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.1 Before Using the I/O Modules

Output modules

Precautions common to all output modules
Maximum switching frequency when L load is driven
The maximum switching frequency imposes a limit on the use; an ON state or an OFF state must not be changed without an interval of at least one second.

Load to be connected
When connecting a counter or timer utilizing a DC-DC converter as a load of the output module, select an output module whose maximum load current is higher than the inrush current of a load to be connected. If the selection is based on the average current of a load to be connected, an inrush current flows cyclically from the load while the output module is in an ON state or in operation, which can cause failure of the output module. If it is necessary to select an output module on the basis of the average current of a load to be connected, to alleviate the effect of the inrush current, take any of the following corrective actions: � Connecting a resistor in series with the load

Resistor Load

Output

module

� Connecting an inductor in series with the load
Inductor Load
Output module

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.1 Before Using the I/O Modules

111

Precautions when using the transistor output module

Measures against reverse current
In the following connections, a reverse current flows to the output element, which can cause failure. When wiring, set up diodes as the following figures show: � When connecting transistor output modules in parallel

Sink type

Source type

OUT1 OUT2 COM

Load Load

OUT1 OUT2 COM

Load Load

OUT1 OUT2 COM

� When providing another circuit in parallel with a transistor output module

Sink type

Source type

Additional circuit

OUT COM

Sink type

Source type

OUT

Inductive load

OUT

Inductive load

COM

About element protection of the output module
If excessive noise affects the terminals of the output module, the output may be turned on to help the protection of the output element. Adjust the voltage between terminals of the output module to fall within the operating load voltage range by taking measures such as the following: � To use an inductive load such as a relay, a surge suppressor is required on the load side as well. Take appropriate
measures with the measures against back EMF as a guide. � To prevent excessive noise, avoid installing power cables together with I/O cables.

112

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.1 Before Using the I/O Modules

I/O combined module
There are no precautions specific to I/O combined modules. Refer to the following precautions. Page 110 Input modules Page 111 Output modules
6

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.1 Before Using the I/O Modules

113

6.2 Setting Switch

Indicator cover of the I/O module (waterproof module)
To operate the setting switches of the I/O module (waterproof module), loosen the screws for the indicator cover with the screwdriver and open the cover. After finishing the operation, be sure to close the indicator cover and tighten the screws. When the cover is open or the screws have not been tightened properly, waterproof performance is lost.

Tightening torque

Tighten the screws for the indicator cover within the following tightening torque range.

Screw type Indicator cover screw (M3 screw)

Tightening torque range 0.43 to 0.57Nm

� Do not put oil on the screws. Doing so may damage the screws. � Tighten the screws with an applicable screwdriver. Tightening with an inapplicable screwdriver may damage
the screws.

114 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.2 Setting Switch

Setting the IP address/station number setting switches
Set the station number using the IP address/station number setting switches on the front of the I/O module. The setting of the IP address/station number setting switches is enabled when the I/O module is powered on. Therefore, set this function when the module is powered off.

When operating the IP address/station number setting switches, use a flathead screwdriver with a tip width of 2.5mm or less.

Setting method
Set the station number using the IP address/station number setting switches x1 and x16 (hexadecimal). Combinations of x1 and x16 are as follows.

x1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ABCDEF 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95

6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 x16
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159

A 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175

B 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191

C 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207

D 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223

E 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239

F 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

Ex. To set to 30:

115 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.2 Setting Switch

Setting range
Set a value in the range of 1 to 120. When a value outside the range is set, an IP address/station number setting switch out of range error (error code: 0106H) occurs, and the DATA LINK LED flashes.
� Do not change the IP address/station number setting switches while the I/O module is powered on. If the IP address/station number setting switches are changed while the I/O module is powered on, an IP address/ station number setting switch changed error (error code: 0200H) occurs, and the ERR. LED flashes. After setting the IP address/station number setting switches back to the previous setting, turn on Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10) to clear the error state and turn off the ERR. LED.
� Do not set a station number duplicated with other station numbers. If a station number is duplicated, a communication error occurs and the DATA LINK LED does not turn on.
Precautions
When operating switches, use products for static elimination or an antistatic screwdriver, or touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
116 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.2 Setting Switch

Function setting switch setting
Set the following functions using the function setting switch on the front of I/O module. � Network setting function � Input response time setting function � Output HOLD/CLEAR setting function � CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function � Fast link-up function The setting of function setting switch is enabled when the I/O module is powered on. Thus, set each function when the module is powered off.
When operating the function setting switch, use a flathead screwdriver having a blade of 1.2mm or less in width.
Setting procedure
Set each function with function setting switch 1 to function setting switch 10.
6

Switch name

Function name

Setting details

Function setting switch 1

NETWORK

Network setting function

� OFF: CC-Link IE TSN communication mode (Factory default)*1
� ON: CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode Set it to ON to perform a unit test. ( Page 192 Unit
Test)

Function setting switch 2 to function setting switch 4

RESPONSE

Input response time setting function

Set the input response time. ( Page 152 Setting method)

Function setting switch 5

HOLD/CLEAR Output HOLD/CLEAR setting function

Set output HOLD/CLEAR. ( Page 153 Setting method)

Function setting switch 6 Function setting switch 7

MODE

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication mode setting function

Set the operation mode for the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function. ( Page 161 Setting method)

Function setting switch 8 Function setting switch 9

F LINK P1/P2 Fast link-up function

Set the fast link-up function. ( Page 164 Setting method)

Function setting switch 10

LINK SPEED Use prohibited

Fix this switch to OFF.

*1 When using the I/O module in CC-Link IE TSN communication mode, refer to the following. CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN Communication Mode)

Do not change any function setting switch while the I/O module is powered on. If the setting of a function setting switch is changed while the I/O module is powered on, one of the errors from Function setting switch 1 changed error (error code: 0201H) to Function setting switch 10 changed error (error code: 020AH) occurs, and the changed setting of that function setting switch is not applied. Returning the function setting switch to its previous position and turning on Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10) eliminate the error.

117 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.2 Setting Switch

Precautions
Slide one function setting switch at a time horizontally. Do not hold the screwdriver at an angle or pivot it off the edge of the case while working a function setting switch, since damage or deformation may result.
(1) (2)
(1) Flathead screwdriver (2) Function setting switch
118 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.2 Setting Switch

6.3 Installation Environment and Installation Position
Installation environment

Installation location
Do not install the I/O module to the following environment:

I/O module (except for waterproof module)
� Ambient temperature is outside the range from 0 to 55;

� Ambient humidity is outside the range from 5 to 95% RH;

� Condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change;

� Corrosive gas or combustible gas is present;

� Conductive powder such as dust and iron powder, oil mist, salinity, or organic solvent is filled;

� The I/O module is exposed to direct sunlight;

� A strong electric field or strong magnetic field is generated; and

� The I/O module is subject to vibration and shock.

I/O module (waterproof module)

� Ambient temperature is outside the range from 0 to 55;

� IP67 is not satisfied;

� Condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change;

� Corrosive gas or combustible gas is present;

� Conductive powder such as dust and iron powder, oil mist, salinity, or organic solvent is filled;

� The I/O module is exposed to direct sunlight;

� A strong electric field or strong magnetic field is generated; and

� The I/O module is subject to vibration and shock.

Installation surface
Install the I/O module on the flat surface. When the installation surface is uneven, excessive force is applied to the printedcircuit board and may cause a defect.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.3 Installation Environment and Installation Position

119

Installation position
I/O module (except for waterproof module)
When installing the I/O module (except for waterproof module) in a control panel, provide a clearance of 60mm or more (1) between the module and the sides of the control panel or other parts to ensure good ventilation and facilitate module change. When installing two or more CC-Link IE TSN remote modules next to each other, they can be installed in contact with each other.

(1)

I/O module (waterproof module)
When installing the I/O module (waterproof module) in a control panel, provide a clearance of 50mm or more (1) between the module and the sides of the control panel or other parts to ensure good ventilation and facilitate module change. When installing two or more CC-Link IE TSN remote modules next to each other, they can be installed in contact with each other. When using a right-angle, waterproof connector or a Y-branch connector, however, provide a clearance to avoid stress on cables.
(1) (1)

(1)

120

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.3 Installation Environment and Installation Position

Installation direction
The I/O module can be installed in six directions. Use the DIN rail to install the I/O module (except for waterproof module). Note that the DIN rail cannot be used to install the I/ O module (waterproof module). Ex. Installing the I/O module (except for waterproof module)
(3)

(2)

(6)

(1)

(4)

(5)
(1) DIN rail (2) Horizontal installation (3) Downward installation (4) Vertical installation (5) Upward installation (6) Horizontal installation (upside down)

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.3 Installation Environment and Installation Position

121

6.4 Installation
Mounting the I/O modules (except for waterproof module) on a DIN rail

Installation procedure

1. Hang the upper tabs of the I/O module (except for
waterproof module) on a DIN rail.

2. Push in the DIN rail hooks of the module until they click.

Do not slide modules from the edge of the DIN rail when mounting them. The modules may be damaged.

Removal procedure
Remove the modules from the DIN rail by reversing the above procedure.
1. While pushing down the DIN rail hook with a flathead
screwdriver, remove the module from the DIN rail by pulling its lower part toward you.
Applicable DIN rail models
Use the following DIN rails that are compliant with JIS C 2812 and IEC 60715. � TH35-7.5Fe � TH35-7.5Al
Interval between DIN rail mounting screws
Tighten the screws at intervals of 200mm or less.
122 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.4 Installation

Fixing the I/O module (waterproof module)

When fixing the I/O module (waterproof module), tighten all of three screws. If any of the screws is loose, the module will be greatly affected by vibration, causing failure of the module. When installing the module, tighten screws within the following torque range.

Screw type Module mounting screw/FG metal fitting screw (M4 screw)

Tightening torque range 0.83 to 1.11Nm

� Do not put oil on the screws. Doing so may damage the screws. � Tighten the screws with an applicable screwdriver. Tightening with an inapplicable screwdriver may damage
the screws.

123 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.4 Installation

6.5 Wiring of Terminal Block for Module Power Supply
and FG

Tightening torque

Tighten the terminal block mounting screws within the following specified torque range. Tightening the screws too much may damage the case of I/O module (except for waterproof module).

Screw type Terminal block mounting screw (M2.5 screw)

Tightening torque range 0.2 to 0.3 Nm

Wire to be used

The following table describes the wire to be connected to the terminal block for module power supply and FG.

Diameter 22 to 16 AWG

Type Stranded

Material Copper

Temperature rating 75 or more

Applicable solderless terminal

The following table lists the applicable solderless terminal.

Product name
Bar solderless terminal

Terminal shape

Model

Ferrule (with insulation sleeve)
Ferrule (without insulation sleeve)

TE0.5-8, TE0.5-10 TE0.75-8, TE0.75-10 AI0.34-10TQ AI0.5-10WH AI0.75-10GY A0.5-10 A0.75-10 A1.0-10 A1.5-10

Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.5 0.75 0.34 0.5 0.75 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5

Bar solderless terminal tool NH-79A
CRIMPFOX6

Contact
NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

Installing and removing the terminal block
To remove the terminal block, loosen the terminal block mounting screws with a flathead screwdriver. To install the terminal block, tighten the terminal block mounting screw with a flathead screwdriver. Failure to secure the terminal block may cause drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

124

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.5 Wiring of Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG

Connecting and disconnecting the cable
To connect the cable, fully insert a wire with a bar solderless terminal into a wire insertion opening. After inserting the wire, pull it lightly to check that it is securely clamped.

(1)

Continuity can be checked with test terminal (1).

Use the following test plug to check continuity.

� PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG test plug (1.0mm): MPS-MT 1-S4-B RD, MPS-MT 1-S

To disconnect the cable, push in the open/close button with a flathead screwdriver. With the button pushed in, pull out the wire having a bar solderless terminal.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.5 Wiring of Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG

125

Precautions
� Use a bar solderless terminal for the wiring to the push-in type spring clamp terminal block. If a stripped wire is inserted into a wire insertion opening, the wire cannot be securely clamped.
� For how long the wire should be stripped, follow the specifications of the bar solderless terminal used. To attach a bar solderless terminal to a wire, use a crimping tool.
� Before inserting a bar solderless terminal into a wire insertion opening (1), check the shape of the opening and the shape of the terminal. Insert the terminal paying attention to the orientation. If a bar solderless terminal larger than wire insertion opening (1) is inserted, the terminal block may be damaged.
(1) 2.4mm
1.5mm

126

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.5 Wiring of Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG

6.6 Wiring of Connector for Module Power Supply and
FG

Applicable plugs

The following table lists plugs applicable to the connector for power supply and FG.

Product name

Model name of Mitsubishi Electric product

Model name of part*6

Specifications
Applicable cable (core wire size)

Applicable cable (outer diameter)

Maximum rated current

Color of the cover

One-touch connector
plug for power supply and FG*1*3*4

A6CON-PW5P A6CON-PW5P-SOD

35505-6080-A00 GF 35505-6180-A00 GF

0.75 (0.66 to 0.98) (18 AWG) 0.16mm or larger for wire diameter Insulating coating material PVC (heat resistant vinyl)

2.2 to 3.0mm

7A*5

2.0 to 2.3mm

Gray Blue

Online connector for

A6CON-PWJ5P

power supply and FG*2

35720-L200-A00 AK

*1 One order of Mitsubishi Electric A6CON-5P includes 10 plugs. *2 One order of Mitsubishi Electric A6CON-J5P includes 5 plugs. *3 One-touch connector plugs cannot be reused once crimped. *4 Check the outer diameter of the applicable cable before selecting a connector. *5 The allowable current values of the cables connected must be observed. *6 Contact (manufacturer of the plugs): 3M Japan Limited

Wiring procedure

Plug body

Plug cover

1. Checking parts of the connector
Check that the plug cover is attached to the plug body. Do not push the plug cover into the plug body before inserting cables. Once clamped, the plug cannot be reused.

Metal contact Metal contacts Metal contacts

2. Inserting cables
Lift the rear part of the plug cover, and insert a cable fully to the end of the plug cover. If a cable is not inserted fully, it may cause a poor crimping. The cables to be inserted must be applicable cables.
3. Setting the plug cover
After inserting cables, push down the rear part of the plug cover so that the plug cover is engaged with metal contacts.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.6 Wiring of Connector for Module Power Supply and FG

127

Pliers

Side view

Pliers Latches

[Correct crimping]

0.2mm or less

[Incorrect crimping]

4. Crimping
Hold the center of plug cover with pliers and squeeze the cover in. Fully push in the both edges (parts holding latches) of the plug cover. Check that the latches are engaged with the plug body.
5. Checking the crimped state (from the wire side)
Check that the plug body and plug cover are aligned horizontally seen from the wire side. The lifted part of the plug cover must be 0.2mm or less. As shown in the incorrect crimping, if the plug cover is lifted aslant or protruded from the plug body by more than 0.2mm, it may result in improper crimping. Push in the plug cover correctly and fully with pliers as shown in the correct crimping.

[Correct crimping] [Incorrect crimping]

6. Checking the crimped state (from the above)
Check that there is no clearance between the plug body and plug cover seen from the above. As shown in the incorrect crimping, latches engaged improperly cause clearance between the plug body and plug cover. Push in the plug cover correctly and fully with pliers as shown in the correct crimping.

Latches

Latch

Clearance

128

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.6 Wiring of Connector for Module Power Supply and FG

When using a cabtyre cable, strip the jacket of the cable by 2cm or more. If the wires are uneven in length, cut the ends of the wires to an even length with a tool, such as a nipper, before inserting them to the connector.
2cm or more
Trim the wire ends to the same length
Precautions
When modules are transition wired through connectors for module power supply and FG, a current flows in the modules. When applying transition wiring, design the system so that the current that flows in the modules is equal to or lower than the allowable current value of each module.
6

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.6 Wiring of Connector for Module Power Supply and FG

129

6.7 Wiring the I/O Module (Waterproof Module) to the
Power Supply
For the wiring, connect the power supply to the POWER IN terminal of the power supply connector of the I/O module (waterproof module).
Transition wiring of the power supply
When installing multiple I/O modules (waterproof module), the power can be supplied to the modules through transition wiring. For transition wiring, connect cables between the POWER OUT terminal of the module (power supplier) and the POWER IN terminal of another module (power supply destination).
(1)
(1) Power supply
For transition wiring, check the current consumption of each wired I/O module (waterproof module). For the current consumption of the modules, refer to the following performance specifications. Page 21 Input module, Page 46 Output module,Page 79 I/O combined module
Precautions
The largest current flows from the power supply to the power supply connector of the first I/O module (waterproof module). Make sure that the current does not exceed the following current capacity of the power supply connector. � Module-and-sensor power supply: 8A per pin � Load power supply and external power supply for output part: 12A per pin For a power supply to supply 24VDC, use a power supply (SELV power supply) that does not exceed 30VAC (effective value), 42.4V (peak value), or 60VDC. Also, use a power supply which is applied to "limited-energy circuit" defined in IEC 61010-1.

130

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.7 Wiring the I/O Module (Waterproof Module) to the Power Supply

6.8 Wiring of Ethernet Cable

Connecting the Ethernet cable to the I/O module (except for waterproof module)

Connecting
1. Power off the module power supply of the I/O module (except for waterproof module) and the power of the external

device.

2. Push the Ethernet cable connector into the I/O module (except for waterproof module) until it clicks. Pay attention to the

connector's orientation.

3. Power on the module power supply of the I/O module (except for waterproof module).

4. Power on the external device.

5. Check if P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED on the port into which the Ethernet cable is connected is on.*1

*1 The time taken for P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED to turn on after connection of the Ethernet cable may vary. The LINK LED normally turns

on in a few second. However, if link-up processing is repeated due to a condition of a device on the line, the longer time may be

required. If P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED does not turn on, refer to the following and take a corrective action.

Page 189 When the P1 LINK LED or P2 LINK LED turns off

� To use only one of them for star topology, either P1 or P2 can be connected. � To use both of them for line topology and ring topology, P1-P1, P2-P2, and P1-P2 connections are possible.

� For how to connect Ethernet cables for using the fast link-up function, refer to the following. Page 163 Fast Link-Up Function
Disconnecting
1. Power off the module power supply of the I/O module (except for waterproof module). 2. Press the latch down and unplug the Ethernet cable.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.8 Wiring of Ethernet Cable

131

Connecting the Ethernet cable to the I/O module (waterproof module)
Connecting
1. Power off the module power supply of the I/O module (waterproof module) and the power of the external device. 2. Insert the Ethernet cable connector into the I/O module (waterproof module). Pay attention to the connector's orientation. 3. Tighten the Ethernet cable connector. 4. Power on the module power supply of the I/O module (waterproof module). 5. Power on the external device. 6. Check if P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED on the port into which the Ethernet cable is connected is on.*1
If P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED does not turn on, refer to the following and take a corrective action. Page 189 When the P1 LINK LED or P2 LINK LED turns off
*1 The time taken for P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED to turn on after connection of the Ethernet cable may vary. The LINK LED normally turns on in a few second. However, if link-up processing is repeated due to a condition of a device on the line, the longer time may be required.
Both P1 and P2 connectors can be used. � To use only one of them for star topology, either P1 or P2 can be connected. � To use both of them for line topology and ring topology, P1-P1, P2-P2, and P1-P2 connections are possible.
Disconnecting
1. Power off the module power supply of the I/O module (waterproof module). 2. Loosen the Ethernet cable connector and remove the cable.

132

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.8 Wiring of Ethernet Cable

Precautions

Laying Ethernet cables
� Place the Ethernet cable in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the I/O module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
� Do not touch the core of the connector of the cable or the module, and protect it from dirt and dust. If any oil from your hand, or any dirt or dust sticks to the core, it can increase transmission loss, causing data link to fail.
� For the Ethernet cables to be used, check that they are not disconnected or short-circuited and that there is no problem with connector connection.

Broken cable latch
Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches. Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction.

Connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable
Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling the cable connected to the I/O module
may result in damage to the I/O module or cable or malfunction due to poor contact.

Connectors without Ethernet cable
Attach connector covers or waterproof caps to prevent dirt and dust from entering the I/O module and prevent I/O module

failure and malfunction caused by static electricity.

Maximum segment length for the Ethernet cable (Maximum cable length)
The maximum segment length for the Ethernet cable is 100m. However, the distance may be shorter depending on the

operating environment of the cable. For details, contact the manufacturer of the cables used.

Bending radius of the Ethernet cable
There are restrictions on the bending radius of the Ethernet cable. Check the bending radius in the specifications of the
Ethernet cables used.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.8 Wiring of Ethernet Cable

133

6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device
Wiring of spring clamp terminal block

Wire to be used

The following table describes the wire to be connected to the spring clamp terminal block.

Diameter 22 to 16 AWG

Type Stranded

Material Copper

Temperature rating 75 or more

Applicable solderless terminal

The following table lists the applicable solderless terminal.

Product name
Bar solderless terminal

Terminal shape

Model

Ferrule (with insulation sleeve)
Ferrule (without insulation sleeve)

AI0.34-10TQ AI0.5-10WH AI0.75-10GY A0.5-10 A0.75-10 A1.0-10 A1.5-10

Applicable wire size*1 0.34 0.5 0.75 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5

Bar solderless terminal tool
CRIMPFOX6

Contact
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

*1 When using a solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve, select the terminal whose applicable wire size is 0.75 or smaller.

134

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

Installing or removing the terminal block

The following procedures show how to install and remove the terminal block.

Lock and release lever positions

To make it easy to install and remove the terminal block, a three-stage positioning stopper is attached so that the lever does

not freely turn around.

When installing or removing the terminal block, turn the lever to the lock or release lever position.

View of right side of I/O module: When pulling out the terminal block

1. Release lever position

This lever position shows the state in which the terminal

block (1) has been completely pulled out from the I/O

module. Turn from the locking lever position to the release

(2)

lever position (2) and lift the terminal block from the I/O

module.

(1)

View of right side of I/O module: When insertion of the terminal block is complete

2. Lock lever position
This position shows the state in which the terminal block (1)

completely fits the I/O module. Check the lock lever position

(2) and pull the terminal block lightly to check that the I/O

module completely fits the terminal block.

(1) (2)

Removal procedure
Turn the lever to the release lever position and remove the terminal block from the I/O module.
Installation procedure
Move the lever to the locking lever position and push the terminal block. If the terminal block is fully pushed in, the hook of the lever hangs on the I/O module and fits the terminal block.
The terminal block can be inserted with the lever locations other than the lock lever position. After insertion, check that the lever is in the lock lever position.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

135

Signal name and wiring
For the signal names of the terminal block and wiring of the external device, refer to the specifications of each module. ( Page 21 Performance Specifications) Incorrect wiring can cause malfunction of or damage on the I/O module.
Connecting and disconnecting the cable
Connecting the cable
Strip the cable as follows. � The strip length of wire: 10mm Insert a wire whose tip was processed into a wire insertion opening (2) and push it all the way in to the back. If the wire cannot be inserted by this method, insert the wire all the way in to the back while pressing the release button (1) using a flathead screwdriver with a tip width of 2.0 to 2.5mm. Once the wire is inserted all the way in to the back, remove the flathead screwdriver.
(1)
(2)
Pull the wire or bar solderless terminal lightly to check that it is securely clamped.
Disconnecting the cable
Pull the wire while pressing the release button using a flathead screwdriver with a tip width of 2.0 to 2.5mm.

136

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

Precautions
� Use bar solderless terminals for wiring to the terminal block. If a stripped wire is inserted into a wire insertion opening as-is, the wire cannot be securely clamped.
� Use a crimping tool to connect a bar solderless terminal to a wire. ( Page 134 Applicable solderless terminal) � When inserting a bar solderless terminal, check that the size of the terminal and its insertion direction are correct to prevent
the terminal from getting stuck in or the terminal block damage. When using a bar solderless terminal other than the applicable solderless terminals, check that for its size, the cross-sectional shape of the terminal after processing (1) is smaller than the size mentioned below, even including an error in processing. For the correct terminal insertion direction, refer to the figure below.
(1) (2.4mm) (1.8mm)
R1.2mm
6
For details on the finish shape of a bar solderless terminal including an error in processing, contact the manufacturers of the bar solderless terminal and the bar solderless terminal tool.

1.5mm

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

137

Wiring of screw terminal block

Tightening torque

Tighten the terminal screw within the following tightening torque range. Tightening the screws too much may damage the I/O module case.

Screw type Terminal screw (M3 5.2 screw) Terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw)

Tightening torque range 0.43 to 0.57Nm 0.68 to 0.92Nm

Wire to be used

The following table describes the wire to be connected to the screw terminal block.

Diameter 22 to 14 AWG

Type Stranded

Material Copper

Temperature rating 75 or more

Applicable solderless terminal

The following table lists the applicable solderless terminal.

Model RAA1.25-3 V2-MS3 TGV2-3N

Applicable wire size 0.3 to 1.25 1.25 to 2.0 1.25 to 2.0

Contact J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. NICHIFU Co., Ltd.

Installing or removing the terminal block
Removal procedure
When the terminal block mounting screws (two points) are loosened, the two-piece terminal block can be removed.
Installation procedure
1. Install the two piece terminal block. 2. Tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Signal name and wiring
For the signal names of the terminal block and wiring of the external device, refer to the specifications of each module. ( Page 21 Performance Specifications) Incorrect wiring can cause malfunction of or damage on the module.

138

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

Wiring method
(1)

1. Loosen the terminal screw. Connect the round
solderless terminal (1) as it is.

� Do not put oil on the terminal and screw. Failure to do so may damage the screw.

� The number of the applicable solderless terminals must be two or less. When inserting two applicable

solderless terminals, insert them back-to-back. Otherwise the screw cannot be tightened and it may

damage the screw.

� Tighten the terminal screw with an applicable driver. Tightening with an inapplicable driver may damage the

screw.

� When operating terminal screws in the lower row, prevent the screwdriver from contacting the upper row. If the screwdriver contacts the upper row, it may damage the terminal block.

� Install the terminal block so it is level. If the terminal block skews when installed, it may damage the contacts

of the terminal block.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

139

Wiring of 40-pin connector

Tightening torque

Tighten the connector screws within the following tightening torque range. Undertightening can cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

Screw type Connector screw (M2.6 screw)

Tightening torque range 0.20 to 0.29Nm

Applicable connector
The following tables list the types of 40-pin connectors and reference products of crimping tools and pressure-displacement tools.

40-pin connector

Type Soldering type connector (straight type) Crimping type connector (straight type) IDC type connector (straight type)
Soldering type connector (dual purpose (straight/oblique) type)

Model A6CON1*1 A6CON2 A6CON3
A6CON4*1

Applicable wire size
0.08 to 0.3 (28 to 22 AWG), (stranded wire) 0.08 to 0.24 (28 to 24 AWG), (stranded wire) 0.08 (28 AWG) (stranded wire) 0.25mm (30 AWG) (solid wire) Flat cable (intervals of 1.27mm) 0.08 to 0.3 (28 to 22 AWG), (stranded wire)

*1 When using 40 pins, use cables whose sheath outside diameters are 1.3mm or shorter. Select cables according to the amount of current to flow.
40-pin connector crimping tool and pressure-displacement tool

Type
Crimping tool
Pressure-displacement tool

Model FCN-363T-T005/H FCN-367T-T012/H (locator plate) FCN-707T-T001/H (cable cutter) FCN-707T-T101/H (hand press)

Contact FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED

For how to wire the connectors and how to use the crimping tool and pressure-displacement tools, contact FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED.

140

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

Wiring method
For A6CON1 and A6CON4

1. Loosen four screws of the connector and remove the
screws.
2. Remove the covers from the body.

Heat shrink tube

6
3. Solder the wires and cover the wires with heat
shrinkable tubes.
4. Check the terminal layout and connect the wires to the
connector body.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

141

5. Place the body in one of the cover and insert the fixing
screws into the screw holes. After that, fit the other cover on the body.
6. Tighten the four screws.

For A6CON2
The following table shows the specifications of the FCN-363T-T005/H to be used for the A6CON2.

Applicable wire size
24 AWG 26 AWG 28 AWG

Cross-section area of the wire 0.20 to 0.24 0.13 to 0.16 0.08 to 0.096

Crimp height
1.25 to 1.30 1.20 to 1.25 1.15 to 1.20

Sheath outside diameter 1.2 or less 1.2 or less 1.2 or less

Stripping length
3.0 to 4.0 3.0 to 4.0 3.0 to 4.0

For wiring of the A6CON2, a special tool is required. For how to use or adjust the tool, contact FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED.

For A6CON3
For wiring of the A6CON3, special tools are required.
For how to use or adjust the tools, contact FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED.
1. Check the terminal layout and crimp the wires to the
connector.

The following figure shows the array of terminals for flat cables. (a view from the outlet of a 40-pin connector)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20

142

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

Installation procedure

1. Connecting a connector
Connect the wired connector to the I/O module.

Connector screw
2. Tightening connector screws
Tighten two connector screws (M2.6 screw).
6

Removal procedure

1. Removing a connector
Loosen two connector screws and pull out the connector horizontally from the module.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

143

Precautions
Laying cables
� To connect the cables to the I/O module, securely connect the connector and fix it with screws at two points. � Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, a dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage
to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
40-pin connector
� 40-pin connectors (A6CON) must be crimped or pressed with tools specified by the manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. Incomplete connections may cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
� For wires to be connected to 40-pin connectors (A6CON), use copper wires with the temperature rating of 75 or more.
To ensure that this product complies with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, refer to the following. Page 243 EMC and Low Voltage Directives Even though the compliance with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive is not required, configuring a system that complies with the EMC Directive may reduce effects of the external noise.

144

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

Wiring of sensor connector (e-CON)

Applicable connector

The following table lists reference products of sensor connectors (e-CON).

Model
ECN-M014R ECN-M024Y ECN-M034OR ECN-M044GN ECN-M054BL ECN-M064GY

Manufacturer Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

Specifications
Applicable cable (core wire size)
0.14 to 0.30 (26 to 24 AWG)

0.30 to 0.50 (22 to 20 AWG)

Applicable cable (outer diameter) 0.8 to 1.0mm 1.0 to 1.2mm 1.2 to 1.6mm 1.0 to 1.2mm 1.2 to 1.6mm 1.6 to 2.0mm

Maximum rated current
2.0A

Color of the cover
Red Yellow Orange Green Blue Gray

Signal name and wiring

For the signal names of the terminal block and wiring of the external device, refer to the specifications of each module. ( Page 21 Performance Specifications)

Incorrect wiring can cause malfunction of or damage on the module.

Wiring method
For how to wire the sensor connectors (e-CON), refer to the catalogs of each manufacturer.

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

145

Wiring of waterproof connectors
Applicable connectors and cables
For connectors and cables that can be used for the I/O module (waterproof module), refer to the following. Page 147 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)
Signal names and wiring
For the signal names of the connectors and wiring of the external device, refer to the specifications of each module. ( Page 21 Performance Specifications) Incorrect wiring can cause malfunction of or damage on the module.
Connecting 1. Insert the I/O cable connector into the I/O module (waterproof module). Pay attention to the connector's orientation. 2. Tighten the I/O cable connector.
Disconnecting 1. Loosen the I/O cable connector and remove the cable.
� If the I/O cable is damp, the connector's resin part of the module may get wet from the moisture on the cable at its removal. Dry or wipe up the water from the resin part for re-connecting the I/O cable.
� At the removal of I/O cable or waterproof cap, an O-ring attached to the connector of the I/O module (waterproof module) may also come off with the cable or cap. In such a case, re-attach that O-ring to the connector of the module.

146

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.9 Wiring of I/O Module and External Device

6.10 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/
O Module (Waterproof Module)
The following tables list applicable waterproof cables/connectors. For details on applicable waterproof connectors, refer to the website of each manufacturer.

For power supply

The waterproof cables are listed below. , of a model represents the length of the cable.

Connector

Model

M12 5 pins (4 + FE) Male, female
M12 5 pins (4 + FE) Female, discrete wire

L code

SC-M12PWL5MF-,MU SC-M12PWL5F-,MU

For I/O

The waterproof connectors/cables are listed below. , of a model represents the length of the cable.

Connector

Model

M12 5 pins Male, discrete wire
M12 4 pins Male, discrete wire
M12 5 pins Male, discrete wire (shielded)
M12 4 pins Male, discrete wire (shielded)
M12, A code

A code

SC-M12SNA5M-,MU SC-M12SNA4M-,MU SC-M12SNA5SM-,MU SC-M12SNA4SM-,MU SACC-M12MS-5CON-PG 7-M SACC-M12MS-5CON-PG 9-M

Connection cable diameter

Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

Connection cable diameter

Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

4.0 to 6.0mm 6.0 to 8.0mm

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

Y-branch connector for I/O
The waterproof connector is listed below.
Connector

M12 5 pins Male

A code

Model SAC-5P-M12Y/2XM12FS VP

Connection cable diameter

Manufacturer
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.10 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)

147

For communications

The waterproof connectors/cables are listed below. , of a model represents the length of the cable.

Connector

Model

M12 8 pins Male
M12 8 pins Male
M12 8 pins Male
M12 8 pins Male
M12 8 pins Male, X code (cable only)

X code-X code X code-RJ45 X code-X code X code-RJ45

SC-E5EW-X,M SC-E5EW-X,M-MV SC-E5EW-X,M-L SC-E5EW-SX,M SC-E5EW-SX,M-MV SC-E5EW-SX,M-L NBC-M12MSX/, -94F/M12MSX NBC-M12MSX-M12MSX-10G/94F/ , NBC-M12MSX/, -94F/R4AC NBC-M12MSX-R4AC-10G/94F/,
J80026A0100
SC-E5EW-,M

Connection cable diameter

Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co.

5.5 to 9.0mm

Telegartner Karl Gartner GmbH

Mitsubishi Electric System & Service

Co., Ltd.

Waterproof caps
The waterproof caps are listed below.
Type I/O connector, communication connector
Power supply connector (male)
Power supply connector (female)

Model PROT-M12 SC-M12SNCP-CAP PROT-M12 FS SC-M12SNCR-CAP PROT-M12 MS PWR SC-M12PWP-CAP

Manufacturer PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

148

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.10 List of Recommended Cables/Connectors for the I/O Module (Waterproof Module)

6.11 Attaching Waterproof Caps

Tighten the waterproof caps within the following torque range.

Screw type Waterproof cap

Tightening torque range 0.36 to 0.44Nm

6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6.11 Attaching Waterproof Caps

149

7 PARAMETER SETTING
This chapter uses GX Works3 for explanations.
7.1 Network Configuration Setting
For the setting procedure for the master station, refer to the following. User's manual for the master station used
Setting procedure
A profile is required for each of the model names of the modules to be used.
Operating procedure 1. Open the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. 2. Select the module in "Module List" and drag it to the list of stations or the network map.

3. An assignment setting row is added to the station list, the total number of stations is increased, and the selected module
is added to the network map.
4. Set items in the station list if necessary. 5. Click the [Close with Reflecting the Setting] button to complete the setting process and close the window.
� The setting operation can be performed with a general-purpose profile. In that case, select "General Intelligent Device Station" or "General Remote Station" from the "Module List", and then drag and drop it to the station list or the network map.
� A module can also be added to the station list by copying and pasting the model name. In addition, multiple modules can be selected by dragging over model names and copied and pasted collectively. However, since the same value is pasted for the station numbers, the station numbers must be changed to avoid duplication.

150

7 PARAMETER SETTING 7.1 Network Configuration Setting

Setting item list

Item Station number RX/RY setting

Points

RWw/RWr setting

Start End Points

Start End Network Synchronous Communication
Reserved/Error Invalid Station/System Switching Monitoring Target Station

Description Set the station number of the I/O module. Set the assignment of RX/RY points in units of 16 points.
The RX/RY start number is displayed. The RX/RY end number is displayed. Set the assignment of RWw/RWr points in units of 4 points.
The RWw/RWr start number is displayed. The RWw/RWr end number is displayed. Set whether to use the network synchronous communication setting for the I/O module. Set this item when setting the I/O module as a reserved station or error invalid station.

Setting range
1 to 120
16-point module 16 to 128 (Default value: 16) 32-point module 16 to 2048 (Default value: 32)

16-point module 4 to 64 (Default value: 4) 32-point module 4 to 1024 (Default value: 4)

� Asynchronous (Default value) � Synchronous
� No setting (Default value) � Reserved � Error Invalid Station � System Switching Monitoring
Target Station

7 PARAMETER SETTING 7.1 Network Configuration Setting

151

8 FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the details of the functions available in the I/O module, and the setting methods for those functions. For details on remote I/O signals and remote registers, refer to the following. Page 213 Remote I/O Signal Page 220 Remote Register
8.1 Input Response Time Setting Function

Prevents an incorrect input due to noise by setting the response time required for the module to recognize an actual input as the X signal.

Setting method

Set the input response time using function setting switch 2 to function setting switch 4 of the I/O module.

Function setting switch 2 to function setting switch 4

Function setting switch 2

Function setting switch 3

Off

Function setting switch 4 Off On Off On Off On Off On

Input response time setting
1ms*1 0ms 0.2ms 1.5ms 5ms 10ms*2 20ms 70ms

*1 This is a value set to the I/O module (except for waterproof module) as a factory default. *2 This is a value set to the I/O module (waterproof module) as a factory default.
The input response time setting is determined by the statuses of function setting switch 2 to function setting switch 4 at poweron. If the setting of function setting switch 2 to function setting switch 4 is changed while the I/O module is powered on, one of the errors from Function setting switch 2 changed error (error code: 0202H) to Function setting switch 4 changed error (error code: 0204H) occurs, and the changed setting of the input response time is not applied. The setting status of the input response time can be checked by Input response setting status (RWr2.b0 to RWr2.b2). For details, refer to the following. Page 228 Input response setting status (RWr2.b0 to RWr2.b2)

Precautions

Noise may be taken in as an input depending on the input response time setting. The pulse width which is taken in as an input varies depending on the input response time. To set the input response time, consider fully the operating environment. The following table shows the minimum values of the pulse widths which may be taken in as an input. The pulse widths lower than the values shown below can be filtered as noise.

Value of input response time setting
The minimum value of the pulse width which may be taken in as an input (the maximum pulse widths which can be filtered as noise)

0ms

0.2ms 0.003ms

1ms 0.12ms

1.5ms 0.3ms

5ms 2ms

10ms 4ms

20ms 9ms

70ms 36ms

152

8 FUNCTIONS 8.1 Input Response Time Setting Function

8.2 Output HOLD/CLEAR Setting Function

Sets whether to hold or clear the last output value when the I/O module is disconnected from data link, when the CPU module operating status is STOP, or when the CPU module operation is suspended by an error.

Output HOLD/CLEAR setting and its operation

When HOLD or CLEAR is set for an output, the output is turned on or off as follows.

Operating status
Data link in operation CPU module in RUN CPU module in STOP CPU module in PAUSE CPU module in RESET CPU module suspended by error
During disconnection/cyclic stop

Output HOLD/CLEAR setting CLEAR

Last output status Last output status

OFF

Off

Output HOLD/CLEAR setting HOLD

Last output status OFF

Last output status ON

Off

If a moderate or major error has occurred in the I/O module, output turns off regardless of the output HOLD/CLEAR setting.

Setting method

Set HOLD or CLEAR using the function setting switch 5 of I/O module.

Function setting switch 5

Output HOLD/CLEAR setting

Off

CLEAR (Factory default)

HOLD

The setting of the output HOLD/CLEAR setting function is determined by the status of function setting switch 5 when the I/O module is powered on. When the setting of function setting switch 5 is changed while the I/O module is on, a function setting switch 5 changed error (error code: 0205H) occurs, and the changed setting of the output HOLD/CLEAR setting function is not applied. The setting status of the output HOLD/CLEAR setting can be checked by Output HOLD/CLEAR setting status (RWr2.b3). For details, refer to the following. Page 228 Output HOLD/CLEAR setting status (RWr2.b3)

8 FUNCTIONS 8.2 Output HOLD/CLEAR Setting Function

153

8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous
Communication Function
I/O is performed with a synchronization cycle of the master station that supports the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function. This enables the I/O module to operate at the same timing as other slave stations on the same network. The CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function of the I/O module has the following two modes. � Synchronous X/Y control mode ( Page 155 Synchronous X/Y control mode) � Synchronization cycle timing control mode ( Page 157 Synchronization cycle timing control mode)

Applicable master module
When using the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function, use one of the following products as the master module.

MELSEC-Q/L series

Master module QD77GF16 QD77GF8, QD77GF4

Serial number (first five digits) "17102" or later "17101" or later

MELSEC iQ-R series

Master module RJ71GF11-T2 RJ71EN71 RnENCPU RD77GF32, RD77GF16, RD77GF8, RD77GF4

Firmware version "01" or later

To set the synchronization cycle in increments of 0.05ms, use one of the following products as the master module.

Master module RJ71GF11-T2 RJ71EN71 RnENCPU RD77GF32, RD77GF16, RD77GF8, RD77GF4

Firmware version "03" or later
"01" or later

154

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

Synchronous X/Y control mode
Controls I/O by turning on and off the remote input signal and the remote output signal. An I/O module operating in the synchronous X/Y control mode acquires an input signal at each synchronization cycle, and changes the output signal. When the synchronous X/Y control mode is used, the input signal acquisition timing and the output signal change timing can be made to match between I/O modules. The synchronous X/Y control mode has the following two types. � Synchronous X input control ( Page 156 Synchronous X input control) � Synchronous Y output control ( Page 156 Synchronous Y output control)

(1)

(2)

(3)

Input of station No.1

ON OFF

Input of station No.2 OFF

(7) ON

(8)

ON (4)
Output of station No.3 OFF

(5)

Output of station No.4 OFF

(6) Output of station No.5 OFF

(9)
(1) Master module (2) Station No.1 input module (3) Station No.2 input module (4) Station No.3 output module (5) Station No.4 output module (6) Station No.5 output module (7) Input loading timing synchronization (8) Synchronization cycle (9) Output change timing synchronization

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

155

Synchronous X input control
An I/O module operating with synchronous X input control reads out the status of External input X (X terminal) at each synchronization cycle. The read value is also sent to the master station within the next synchronization cycle.
Synchronization cycle of the master station

External input X (Xn terminal) readout processing

(1)
Readout processing

(2)
Readout processing

(3)
Readout processing

(4)
Readout processing

(5)
Readout processing

External input signal X (RX0 to RXF, RX10 to RX1F)

External input status of (1)

External input status of (2)

External input status of (3)

External input status of (4)

Performed by the I/O module

Synchronous Y output control
An I/O module operating with synchronous Y output control receives the external output value from the master station at each synchronization cycle, and outputs the received value in time with the next synchronization cycle.

Synchronization cycle of the master station

External output signal Y (RY0 to RYF, RY10 to RY1F)

(1)

External output Y (Status of the Yn terminal)
Performed by the I/O module

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Output of (1)

Output of (2)

Output of (3)

Output of (4)

156

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

Synchronization cycle timing control mode
Controls I/O by using the time taken from a start of synchronization cycle to when the I/O has changed. Compared to the I/O control performed every synchronization cycle, the I/O control using the synchronization cycle timing control mode has the higher resolution, enables a user to acquire the more precise time when an input signal has changed or to change an output signal at more precise timing. The synchronization cycle timing control mode has the following two types. � Synchronization input timing acquisition control ( Page 157 Synchronization input timing acquisition control) � Synchronization output timing setting control ( Page 159 Synchronization output timing setting control)

Synchronization input timing acquisition control
A time when an input has changed can be acquired based on the synchronization cycle start timing. The I/O module sends the following information to the master station at each synchronization cycle. � Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON: Storing the time when the input has changed from off to on. � Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF: Storing the time when the input has changed from on to off. Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON: 500s, Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF: No change of ON to OFF Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON: No change of OFF to ON, Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF: 800s Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON: No change of OFF to ON, Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF: No change of ON to OFF

Scan program
Synchronization control interrupt program

(1)
8

(2) (3) (4)

� �
�

I/O module

External input X0 (Status of the X0 terminal)

ON OFF
(5)

� (6)

� �

(1) Synchronization cycle (2) Input (3) Operation (4) Output (5) The input has turned on 500s later. (6) The input has turned off 800s later.

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

157

Operation
Ex. The following figure shows the operation of synchronization input timing acquisition control using the external input X0, with the synchronization cycle of the master station set to 3ms.
3ms Synchronization cycle of the master station

Synchronous input timing information X0 OFF ON (RWr10)
Synchronous input timing information X0 ON OFF (RWr11)

5000 (500s)
10000 (1000s)

20000 (2000s)
65535 (No change)

15000 (1500s)
5000 (500s)

(1)

(3)

External input X0 (Status of the X0 terminal)

OFF

(2)

Performed by the I/O module (1) The input has turned on 500s later. (2) The input has turned off 1000s later. (3) The input has turned on 2000s later. (4) The input has turned on 1500s later. (5) The input has turned off twice, 500s later and 2000s later.

(4) (5)

� The operation of external input signal X is the same both for the synchronization input timing acquisition control and for the synchronous X input control. Therefore, even when the I/O module is operating with the synchronization input timing acquisition control, a user can get the input status information of each synchronization cycle start timing by referring to External input signal X (RX0 to RXF, RX10 to RX1F).
� When the external input X (status of the X terminal) has changed OFF to ON to OFF within one synchronization cycle, if the ON status is shorter than the input response time, a value in Synchronization input timing information X OFF to ON/ON to OFF (RWr10 to RWr4F) is not updated.
� When the external input X (status of the X terminal) has changed ON to OFF to ON within one synchronization cycle, if the OFF status is shorter than the input response time, a value in Synchronization input timing information X OFF to ON/ON to OFF (RWr10 to RWr4F) is not updated.
� The resolution of input timing acquisition is 0.1s. � If a major or moderate error occurs in the I/O module, 65535 is stored in Synchronization input timing
information X OFF to ON/ON to OFF (RWr10 to RWr4F).

158

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

Synchronization output timing setting control
This control changes an output status according to the timing that is set based on the synchronization cycle start timing. Set the following for each synchronization cycle. � Synchronization output timing setting Y0 OFF to ON: Set the timing to change the output from off to on. � Synchronization output timing setting Y0 ON to OFF: Set the timing to change the output from on to off. Synchronization output timing setting Y0 OFF to ON: 200s, Synchronization output timing setting Y0 ON to OFF: Do not change the output from on to off. Synchronization output timing setting Y0 OFF to ON: Do not change the output from off to on, Synchronization output timing setting Y0 ON to OFF: 800s Synchronization output timing setting Y0 OFF to ON: Do not change the output from off to on, Synchronization output timing setting Y0 ON to OFF: Do not change the output from on to off.

(1) Scan program

Synchronization control interrupt program

(2) (3) (4)

�

External output Y0

�

(Status of the Y0

OFF

I/O module

terminal)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Synchronization cycle (2) Input (3) Operation (4) Output (5) The output has been turned on 200s later. (6) The output has been turned off 800s later. (7) The I/O module performs the output control according to the settings, at the second synchronization cycle from the setting.

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

159

Operation
Ex. The following figure shows the operation of synchronization output timing setting control using the external output Y0, with the synchronization cycle of the master station set to 3ms.
3ms Synchronization cycle of the master station

Synchronous output timing setting Y0 OFF ON (RWw10)
Synchronous output timing setting Y0 ON OFF (RWw11)

5000 (500s)
10000 (1000s)

External output Y0 (Status of the Y0 terminal)

OFF

Performed by the I/O module (1) The output has been turned on 500s later. (2) The output has been turned off 1000s later. (3) The output has been turned on 1500s later. (4) The output has been turned off 2000s later. (5) The output has been turned off 500s later. (6) The output has been turned on 2000s later.

15000 (1500s)
20000 (2000s)
(2) ON
(1)

20000 (2000s)
5000 (500s)

(4)

(5)

(3)

(6)

(5) (6)

� When the I/O module operates with the synchronization output timing setting control, External output signal Y (RY0 to RYF, RY10 to RY1F) becomes invalid.
� A change of the external output Y (status of the Y terminal) is sent to the connected device with delay of the maximum output response time. Therefore, if the output is set to turn on or off at an interval shorter than the maximum output response time, the actual output may not turn on or off.
� The resolution of output timing setting control is 0.1s. � If the I/O module is disconnected from data link, the CPU module operating status is STOP, or the CPU
module operation is suspended by an error, the output HOLD/CLEAR setting function is prioritized. Therefore, the actual external output may turn on or off differently from the way that is set in Synchronization output timing setting Y OFF to ON/ON to OFF. ( Page 153 Output HOLD/CLEAR Setting Function)

160

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

Setting method

Operation mode

Set the operation mode (synchronous X/Y control mode, synchronization cycle timing control mode) using the function setting switch 6 and the function setting switch 7 of the I/O module.

Function setting switch 6 Off Off On On

Function setting switch 7 Off On Off On

Operation mode Synchronous X/Y control mode (factory default) Synchronization cycle timing control mode Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited*1

*1 If this combination is set, a MODE switch incorrect (error code: 0107H) occurs.

Setting the synchronization cycle (master station)
Set the synchronization cycle of the master station to any of the following: � When the cycle is not set in increments of 0.05ms Set the cycle to 0.88ms, 1.77ms, or 3.55ms. � When the cycle is set in increments of 0.05ms Set a value in the range 0.8ms to 10ms. To use the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function for the I/O module, enable the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function of the master station. For details on the setting method, refer to the manual for the master station in use.
8

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

161

Setting of CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function
The CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function of the I/O module is set with the network configuration setting.
Operating procedure
Before executing step 1 below, use function setting switch 6 and function setting switch 7 to set which operation mode to use (synchronous X/Y control mode, synchronization cycle timing control mode).
1. Open the "CC IE Field Configuration" window.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Model [Basic Settings] [Network Configuration Settings]
2. Set "Network Synchronous Communication" to "Synchronous". 3. In "RWw/RWr Setting", set the address for "Start" and for "End".

4. Click the [Close with Reflecting the Setting] button to close the CC IE Field Configuration window. 5. Click the [Apply] button. 6. After the power has been turned off and on or a remote reset has been performed, the I/O module starts operating in the
synchronous communication mode.
Precautions
� The operating status of the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function can be checked by using the synchronous/asynchronous operation status information (each station) (SW01C8 to SW01CF) of the master station. For details, refer to the manual for the master station in use. When performing I/O control, provide interlock using the above link special register (SW). ( Page 172 CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication program)
� When the master station is a MELSEC-Q series Simple Motion module, always operate the I/O module with the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function enabled.
� The function can be used with the fast link-up function, but even when the fast link-up function is used, the time from data link establishment to synchronous communication start does not change.
Setting status
The setting status of the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function can be checked with the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status (RWr2.b4, RWr2.b5) of the remote register. Page 228 CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status (RWr2.b4, RWr2.b5)

162

8 FUNCTIONS 8.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function

8.4 Fast Link-Up Function

This function shortens the time taken for data link establishment with the master station at power-on. With this function, the time taken to change tools can be shortened in the system with a tool change mechanism (tool changer) for tools that attach to the end of an industrial robot arm. The data link time varies depending on the number of connected modules or cable length. When eight I/O modules are connected (excluding the I/O module directly connected to the master module) and the station-to-station distance is 30m, data link is established in 0.5s on average. Page 178 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function

(1) Robot

Tool changer

(2) Tool 1

Tool 2

(1) System for the robot (2) System implemented in the tool at the end of an arm

Applicable master module

To use the fast link-up function, use one of the following products as the master module.

MELSEC-Q/L series

Master module QJ71GF11-T2 LJ71GF11-T2

Serial number (first five digits) "18042" or later

MELSEC iQ-R series

Master module RJ71GF11-T2 RJ71EN71 RnENCPU

Firmware version "11" or later

163 8 FUNCTIONS
8.4 Fast Link-Up Function

Setting method
Set the fast link-up function for each port. Set whether to enable or disable the fast link-up function of P1 by using function setting switch 8 of the module, and the fast link-up function of P2 by using function setting switch 9 of the module.

(1)

(1) Function setting switch 8 and function setting switch 9

Switch

State

Setting value

Function setting switch 8

Fast link-up function of P1: Enabled

Off

Fast link-up function of P1: Disabled (factory default)

Function setting switch 9

Fast link-up function of P2: Enabled

Off

Fast link-up function of P2: Disabled (factory default)

The status of whether this function is enabled or disabled is determined by the statuses of function setting switch 8 and function setting switch 9 at I/O module startup. After the I/O module was started up, if the state of function setting switch 8 is changed, Function setting switch 8 changed error (error code: 0208H) occurs, and if the state of function setting switch 9 was changed, Function setting switch 9 changed

error (error code: 0209H) occurs. The status of whether this function is enabled or disabled is not changed.

Checking the status of the fast link-up function (enabled/disabled)
The current status of the fast link-up function (enabled/disabled) can be checked with Fast link-up setting status (PORT1) (RWr2.b6) and Fast link-up setting status (PORT2) (RWr2.b7). Page 228 Fast link-up setting status (PORT1) (RWr2.b6) Page 229 Fast link-up setting status (PORT2) (RWr2.b7)

164 8 FUNCTIONS 8.4 Fast Link-Up Function

How to use the fast link-up function
The following describes how to use the fast link-up function.
(1)

� �
� �

(4)

(2)

Tool changer

(5)

� �

� �
(3)

(6)

: The fast link-up function is not supported. : The fast link-up function is disabled. : The fast link-up function is enabled.

No. Description
(1) In the robot-side system (The power is always on.)
(2) Incorporate a master module and an I/O module in the robot-side system. Page 166 Incorporating a master module and an I/O module in the robot-side system The modules in the robot-side system are always on. Page 166 Keeping the modules in the robot-side system always powered on
(3) Connect between ports where the fast link-up function is enabled. Page 166 Connecting between ports where the fast link-up function is enabled Connect P1 and P2. Page 166 Connect P1 and P2.
(4) Enable the fast link-up function for P2 of the I/O module in the robot-side system, and connect to the tool-side system. Page 166 Enabling the fast link-up function for P2 of the I/O module in the robot-side system
(5) In the tool-side system (The modules are powered on only while being connected.)
(6) Simultaneously power on all of the I/O modules in the tool-side system. Page 166 Simultaneously powering on all of the I/O modules in the tool-side system Connect a tool in one second after the master station detects disconnection of a tool. Page 166 Connecting to a different tool in one second after the master station detects a disconnection of a tool previously used

165 8 FUNCTIONS
8.4 Fast Link-Up Function

Setting
Connecting between ports where the fast link-up function is enabled
Enable the fast link-up function for both P1 and P2. If a port where the fast link-up function is enabled is connected with a port where the fast link-up function is not supported or is disabled, link-up is not performed.
Installation and structure
Incorporating a master module and an I/O module in the robot-side system
Incorporate a master module and an I/O module in the robot-side system. Use one of the modules described below as the master module. Page 108 Applicable master station Disable the fast link-up function for a port of the I/O module that is to be connected to the master module.
Connect P1 and P2.
Between the modules where data link is established using the fast link-up function, connect P1 and P2 with cables. Even if the fast link-up function is enabled, link-up will not be performed when P1 is connected to P1 or P2 is connected to P2.
Enabling the fast link-up function for P2 of the I/O module in the robot-side system
Disable the fast link-up function for P1 of the I/O module in the robot-side system, and connect it with the master module. Enable the fast link-up function for P2 of the I/O module in the robot-side system, and connect it with an I/O module in the toolside system. For any other connection, it may take longer time to establish data link.
Operation
Keeping the modules in the robot-side system always powered on
Always keep the master module and I/O module in the robot-side system powered on during operation. In the robot-side system, the master module is connected with the I/O module via a port where the fast link-up function is disabled, and thus the time taken to establish data link after power-on will not be shortened.
Simultaneously powering on all of the I/O modules in the tool-side system
To connect using fast link-up, simultaneously power on all of the I/O modules in the tool-side system after switching a tool to a different one. If the I/O modules are powered on at different times, it may take longer time to establish data link.
Connecting to a different tool in one second after the master station detects a disconnection of a tool previously used
Connect to a tool (cable connection and power-on) in one second or longer after the master station detects a disconnection of a tool previously used. If a tool is connected before a detection of a disconnection or within one second after the detection, it may take longer time to establish data link. A disconnection can be detected by monitoring Data link status (each station) (SW00B0 to SW00B7) of the master station.
Precautions
� After the master station is powered on, it may take longer time to establish data link with each I/O module at the first connection.
� Depending on the operating environment, it may take longer time to establish data link. � If the link scan time when no tool is connected is long, it may take longer time to establish data link. � On the network configuration settings, set line topology for the network topology.
166 8 FUNCTIONS 8.4 Fast Link-Up Function

8.5 Output ON/OFF Information Hold Function

Checks whether the output has been turned on or off.

Output ON information
Output ON information is stored in Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD). Whether the output has been turned on or not can be checked with Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD). Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD) can be cleared using Output Y ON information clear request Y (RWwC, RWwD). The amount of time delay from when Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD) changes until the external output accordingly changes is no more than the maximum output response time. For the on and off timing, refer to the following. Page 230 Output Y ON information

Output OFF information

Output OFF information is stored in Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF).

Whether the output has been turned off or not can be checked with Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF).

Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF) can be cleared using Output Y OFF information clear request Y (RWwE,

RWwF).

The amount of time delay from when Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF) changes until the external output

accordingly changes is no more than the maximum output response time.

For the on and off timing, refer to the following.

Page 231 Output Y OFF information

8 FUNCTIONS 8.5 Output ON/OFF Information Hold Function

167

8.6 Protection Function
The transistor output module and the I/O combined module (transistor output part) have the overload protection function and the overheat protection function.
Overload protection function
If the I/O module detects overcurrent, the module performs the current limiting operation (which limits the overcurrent to a certain value to continue to provide output). For the overcurrent detection value and the limited current, refer to the overload protection function in the specifications for each I/O module. Page 46 Output module Page 79 I/O combined module If the load current becomes equal to the overcurrent detection value or lower, the module returns to normal operation.
Overheat protection function
If the I/O module keeps outputting the overcurrent caused by an overload, heat is generated inside the I/O module. If excessive heat is detected within the I/O module, it turns off the output. The multiple points at which the overheat protection function operates depend on the I/O module. Refer to the "Overheat protection function" column in the specifications table for each I/O module. Page 46 Output module Page 79 I/O combined module If the heat descends, the module automatically returns to normal operation.
The overload protection function and the overheat protection function do not protect external devices; they protect the internal circuit of the I/O module. An abnormal load may raise the internal temperature of the I/O module, causing deterioration in output elements and discoloration of the case and the printed-circuit board. Turn off the corresponding output as soon as a problem on a load is found, and remove the cause.
168 8 FUNCTIONS 8.6 Protection Function

8.7 Module Power Supply Voltage Drop Detection
Function
Detects a voltage drop of the module power supply. This function makes troubleshooting easy when the voltage of power supplied to the I/O module drops or when poor connection in the wiring occurs.

Operation
The module power supply voltage drop detection function starts from the time 500ms passes after the I/O module is powered on. When the module power supply voltage drops below 20.4VDC, a module power supply voltage drop error (error code: 0240H) occurs.

Precautions
The voltage to be detected varies depending on the environment. When an error is detected, since the power supply environment is out of specification range, the operation is not guaranteed. A power supply voltage drop is not detected in the event of a sudden power failure or when power-off operation is performed.
8.8 External Power Supply Monitoring Function

Monitors the ON/OFF status of the external power supply.

Setting method

Sets whether to enable or disable the external power supply monitoring function with External power supply monitor request

(RWw2.b9).

Remote register External power supply monitor request (RWw2.b9)

State On Off

Setting value External power supply monitoring function enable External power supply monitoring function disable

The setting status of the external power supply monitoring function can be checked with External power supply monitor status (RWr2.b9). For details, refer to the following. Page 229 External power supply monitor status (RWr2.b9)

Operation
When External power supply monitor request (RWw2.b9) is turned on, if a state of external power supply being turned off is detected, an external power supply OFF error (error code: 0104H) occurs.

Precautions
� When using the external power supply monitoring function, check that the external power supply stabilizes before turning on External power supply monitor request (RWw2.b9). Also, turn off External power supply monitor request (RWw2.b9) before turning off the external power supply.
� This function cannot be used for the MELSEC-Q series Simple Motion module.

8 FUNCTIONS 8.7 Module Power Supply Voltage Drop Detection Function

169

8.9 Firmware Update Function
This function updates the firmware of the I/O module via CC-Link IE TSN. For details on the firmware update function, refer to the following. CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN Communication Mode)
Precautions
� The firmware cannot be updated in the CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode. Update in the CC-Link IE TSN communication mode.
� When a firmware update is performed, the firmware in the CC-Link IE TSN communication mode and in the CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode are updated.
170 8 FUNCTIONS 8.9 Firmware Update Function

9 PROGRAMMING 9
This chapter describes the programming of the I/O module.
9.1 Precautions for Programming
This section describes precautions to create CC-Link IE Field Network programs.
Cyclic transmission program
For a cyclic transmission program, interlock with the following link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW). � Own station data link status (master station) (SB0049) � Data link status (each station) (SW00B0 to SW00B7) User's manual for the master/local module used Ex. Interlock example
(1)
(2)
(1) Program of communication with a station with station number 1 (2) Program of communication with a station with station number 2
Program for transient transmission
For a program for transient transmission, provide interlock between the following link special relay (SB) and the link special register (SW). � Baton pass status of the own station (master station) (SB0047) � Baton pass status of each station (SW00A0 to SW00A7) User's manual for the master/local module used Ex. Interlock example
(1) (2)
(1)Start contact (2)Dedicated instruction to station No.1
171 9 PROGRAMMING
9.1 Precautions for Programming

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication program
For a CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication program, interlock with the following link special register (SW). The program is to check that I/O module operation is synchronized properly. If the module operation is not synchronized due to a factor such as an error, prevent an unintended operation by stopping I/O control. � Synchronous/asynchronous operation status information (each station) (SW01C8 to SW01CF) of the master station User's manual for the master/local module used
Ex. Example of interlock when X0 and Y10 of the I/O module on the station No.1 are assigned to X1000 and Y1010 of the CPU module respectively

(3)

(1)

(2)

(1) Synchronous/asynchronous operation status information (each station) of the station No.1 (2) X0 of the station No.1 (3) When X0 of the I/O module turns on, Y10 turns on.

172 9 PROGRAMMING 9.1 Precautions for Programming

9.2 Program Example

System configuration

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(1) Master station � Power supply module: R62P � CPU module: R120CPU � Master/local module: RJ71GF11-T2 (Start I/O number: 0000H to 001FH) � Input module: RX40C7 (Start I/O number: 0020H to 002FH) � Output module: RY40NT5P (Start I/O number: 0030H to 003FH) (2) Intelligent device station (IP address/station number setting switches: 1) � I/O module: NZ2GN2S1-32DT (3) Y30: Error lamp (4) X20: Error clear switch (5) Y1010: Lamp (6) X1000: Push button switch
Assignment of link devices

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) RX

X1000 � X101F

RX0 � RX1F

Y
Y1000 � Y101F

RY
RY0 � RY1F

W
W100 � W10F

RWr
RWr0 � RWrF

W
W200 � W20F

RWw
RWw0 � RWwF

(1) Master station (2) Intelligent device station (3) CPU module (4) Master/local module (5) I/O module

9
(5) (6)
173 9 PROGRAMMING
9.2 Program Example

Programming condition
When RX0 of the I/O module turns on, RY10 turns on. When an error occurs, an output module (RY40NT5P) outputs a digital signal.

Devices to be used
Device X1000 Y1010 X20 Y30 D100 M0 N0 SB49 SM400 SW0B0.0 W100.A W101 W200.A

Description RX0 input signal (push button) of the I/O module RY10 output signal (lamp) of the I/O module Error clear switch Error lamp Error code Contact for master control Nesting Own station data link status (master station) Always ON Data link status (station No.1) Error flag Error code Error clear request flag

NZ2GN2S1-32DT (RX0 to RX1F) NZ2GN2S1-32DT (RY0 to RY1F) Input module (X20 to X2F) Output module (Y30 to Y3F)
Device to be written by link refresh

174 9 PROGRAMMING 9.2 Program Example

Setting procedure

Operating procedure

1. Create a project.

[Project] [New...]

2. For the master/local module, set CC-Link IE Field Network master (RJ71GF11-T2).
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Right-click [Add New Module]

175 9 PROGRAMMING
9.2 Program Example

3. Display the CC IE Field Configuration window and set as follows.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Model [Basic Settings] [Network Configuration Settings]
4. Click the [Close with Reflecting the Setting] button to close the CC IE Field Configuration window. 5. Display the refresh parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Model [Basic Settings] [Refresh Settings]
6. Click the [Apply] button. 7. Write the set parameters to the CPU module of the master station and reset the CPU module of the master station, or
turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller. [Online] [Write to PLC]
8. Set the CPU module of the master station to RUN, and check that the DATA LINK LED of the I/O module is turned on.
176 9 PROGRAMMING 9.2 Program Example

Program example
9
(4) When RX0 of the I/O module is on, turn RY10 of the I/O module on. (6) Read the latest error code. (9) Perform the processing to be performed when an error occurs. (11) Clear the error code.
177 9 PROGRAMMING
9.2 Program Example

9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up
Function
This section describes tool switching with the fast link-up function using examples.

System configuration
The following figure shows the system configuration. Switch between tool 1 and tool 2 with the tool changer.

Robot

Tool changer

Tool 1 Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Tool 2 Station No.4

Station No.5

Program overview
Prepare for the following processing for each tool. A series of tool operations will be completed by performing connection, control, and disconnection, in this order.
Connection
Move the arm and control the tool changer to connect to a target tool. Check that data link of all I/O modules in the target tool system has been completed, and proceed to the next process, control.
Control
Actually input or output values to control the tool. When the control is completed, proceed to the next process, disconnection.
Disconnection
Control the tool changer to disconnect the target tool from the arm. Check for a disconnection (data link error) of the I/O modules connected with the tool changer in the target tool system. The tool operation is completed.

178

9 PROGRAMMING 9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function

Setting PLC parameters

In a program example, the low-speed timer is used.

Set "Low Speed Timer/Low Speed Retentive Timer" of "Timer Limit Setting" in the [Operation Related Setting] tab to "100ms".

Project window [Parameter] [CPU Parameter] [Operation Related Setting] tab

9 PROGRAMMING 9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function

179

Devices used by user
Device M1000 M1100 M1101 M1102 M1103 M1104 M1200 M1201 M1202 M1203 M1204 SW00B0
T0

Description Indicates that a tool is connected and in operation. Turn on this device to connect and operate tool 1. Starts the program to connect tool 1. Starts the program to control tool 1. Starts the program to disconnect tool 1. Turns on at completion of the disconnection of tool 1. Turn on this device to connect and operate tool 2. Starts the program to connect tool 2. Starts the program to control tool 2. Starts the program to disconnect tool 2. Turns on at completion of the disconnection of tool 2. Performs monitoring to detect disconnection and return of an I/O module. Use the following. SW00B0.1: Monitoring the module of station No.2 of tool 1 SW00B0.2: Monitoring the module of station No.3 of tool 1 SW00B0.3: Monitoring the module of station No.4 of tool 2 SW00B0.4: Monitoring the module of station No.5 of tool 2 Counts the waiting time (1 second) required to change from tool 1 to the tool 2.

Program condition
To connect and operate tool 1, turn on M1100 (Tool 1 operation start). Disconnection of the tool will be automatically performed at completion of the tool 1 operation (connection and control). To connect and operate tool 2, turn on M1200 (Tool 2 operation start). Disconnection of the tool will be automatically performed at completion of the tool 2 operation (connection and control).

180

9 PROGRAMMING 9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function

Program example
Tool 1 program
Connection of tool 1

(1)

(2)

Program to connect the tool 1

(3)

(4)

(1) Turn on Tool 1 operation start. (2) When the tool is not operating, the tool 1 connection command turns on. (3) Execute the program to connect tool 1. (4) The control command turns on after the returns of the modules of station No.2 and No.3 (data link normally operating stations) are checked.
Control of tool 1

Control completion judgment of the tool 1

Program to control the tool 1

(5)

(6)

(5) Execute the program to control tool 1. (6) The disconnection command turns on after completion of the control of tool 1 is checked.
Disconnection of tool 1

Program to disconnect the tool 1

(7)

(8)

(7) Execute the program to disconnect tool 1. (8) Tool operating turns off and Tool 1 operation completed turns on after the disconnection of the module of station No.2 (data link faulty station) is checked.

9 PROGRAMMING 9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function

181

Tool 2 program
Connection of tool 2

(1)

(2)

Program to connect the tool 2

(3)

(4)

(1) Turn on Tool 2 operation start. (2) When the tool is not operating, the tool 2 connection command turns on. (3) Execute the program to connect tool 2. (4) The control command turns on after the returns of the modules of station No.4 and No.5 (data link normally operating stations) are checked.
Control of tool 2

Program to control the tool 2

(5)

Control completion judgment of the tool 2

(6)

(5) Execute the program to control tool 2. (6) The disconnection command turns on after completion of the control of tool 2 is checked.
Disconnection of tool 2

Program to disconnect the tool 2

(7)

(8)

(7) Execute the program to disconnect tool 2. (8) Tool operating turns off and Tool 2 operation completed turns on after the disconnection of the module of station No.4 (data link faulty station) is checked.
Program to immediately start the tool 2 operation after completion of the tool 1 operation
(1)
(1) After the tool 1 operation has been completed, the tool 2 operation starts.

182

9 PROGRAMMING 9.3 Program Example for Using the Fast Link-Up Function

10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

The I/O module has no special item to be inspected. However, to maintain the best condition of the system, perform the

inspection in accordance with the items described in either of the following manuals, depending on the system configuration of

the master station used.

� MELSEC iQ-R series: MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

� Except for MELSEC iQ-R series: User's manual for the CPU module used

183 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

MEMO
184 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

11 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes error contents that may occur while the I/O module is used and those troubleshooting. This chapter uses GX Works3 for explanations.

11.1 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics

For CC-Link IE Field Network, monitor the status and conduct an operation test.

For details on CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics, refer to the following.

User's manual for the master station used

How to use 1. Connect GX Works3 to the CPU module. 2. Start CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu of GX Works3.
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics]

�

Item to be diagnosed Network configuration diagram and
error status
Selected-station status and error details
Communication Test
IP Communication Test
Cable Test
Link Start/Stop Reserved Station Function Enable
Enable/Disable Ignore Station Errors
Remote Operation

Description
The status of CC-Link IE Field Network can be checked. When an error occurs in the I/O module, the status of the station is displayed on an icon.
The communication status of the station selected in "Network Status" can be checked.*1
The transient communication route and whether the communication is established from the connected station to the destination station can be checked.
This item cannot be performed in the I/O module in CC-Link IE Field Network communication mode.
The cable status between the connected station and the destination station can be checked.
The network data link can be started or stopped.
A reservation for a station can be temporarily cancelled, and the cancellation can be disabled. Also, the station numbers for the modules set as reserved stations can be checked on a list.
A station not set as an error invalid station can be temporarily set as an error invalid station, and the error invalid station setting can be disabled. Also, the station numbers for the modules set as (temporarily) error invalid stations can be checked on a list.
The remote operation of the selected station can be started and the module status can be changed. The remote reset can be performed for the I/O module.

Reference Manual for the master/local module used
Page 187 Remote reset

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.1 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics

185

*1 At the lower left of the window, the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" shows the communication status of the I/O module. For how to check errors of the I/O module, refer to the following. Page 205 Method for Checking Error Codes
Some of items cannot be diagnosed depending on the master/local module used. For details, refer to the following. User's manual for the master/local module used

186

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.1 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics

Remote reset
Perform the following operation to remotely reset a selected I/O module.
Operating procedure 1. Select a slave station to be reset and click the [Remote Operation] button.
11
2. Follow the on-screen instructions and click the [Yes] button. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions and click the [OK] button.
Precautions
Setting of function setting switches
When remote reset is performed, if the setting of function setting switch 1 is different from the setting at power-on, remote reset disable error (error code: 0270H) occurs, and the I/O module is not reset.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.1 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics

187

11.2 Checking the LEDs

This section describes how to troubleshoot the system by the LEDs.

Determining the module error status

An error status can be determined by the On/Off status of RUN LED and ERR. LED as follows.

RUN LED Off
On

ERR. LED On*2
On

Error type*1 Major error
Moderate error

Description
When this error occurs, the module stops operating, and the customer must consult with their local Mitsubishi representative for troubleshooting.
When this error occurs, the module stops operating, but the error can be handled through operation by the customer.

Flashing

Minor error

When this error occurs, the module continues to operate.

*1 When multiple errors occur, the error status is displayed in the order of major error > moderate error > minor error. *2 When the module is faulty, the LED may not turn on.

When the PW LED does not turn on

When the PW LED does not turn on, check the following items.

Check item Is any LED other than the PW LED turned on?
Is the module power supply (24VDC) wired? Is the module power supply (24VDC) turned on? Is the voltage of the module power supply (24VDC) within the specified range?

Action When any LED other than the PW LED turns on, the possible cause is a hardware error. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. Wire the module power supply (24VDC). Turn on the module power supply (24VDC). Set the voltage value within the range of performance specifications.

When the RUN LED does not turn on

When the RUN LED does not turn on, check the following items.

Check item Has any hardware error occurred?

Action
Check that the module power supply voltage is within the range of performance specifications. ( Page 21 Performance Specifications) After the check, power off and on the module. If the RUN LED does not turn on even after the module power supply is turned off and on, the possible cause is a module failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

When the RUN LED flashes

When the RUN LED flashes, check the following items.

Check item

Action

Is the IP address/station number setting switch (x16) of the I/O module set to F, and is function setting switch 1 set to ON?

When a unit test is conducted on the I/O module, the RUN LED turns on after the unit test is completed. Take corrective action according to the result of the unit test. ( Page 192 Unit Test) When a unit test is not conducted, set the IP address/station number setting switches to an appropriate value, and set function setting switch 1 to ON.

188 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 Checking the LEDs

When the ERR. LED turns on or flashes

When the ERR. LED turns on or flashes, check the following items.

Check item

Action

Has any error occurred?

Identify the error factor of the I/O module with the engineering tool to take the corrective action. ( Page 205 Method for Checking Error Codes)

When the P1 LINK LED or P2 LINK LED turns off

When the P1 LINK LED or P2 LINK LED turns off, check the following items.

Check item Are Ethernet cables used compliant with the relevant standard?
Is the segment length 100m or less? Does the cabling condition (bending radius) meet the specifications? Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? Do other stations connected to the I/O module normally operate? Does the switching hub in use normally operate?
Are the modules where the state (enable/disable) of the fast link-up function is the same connected to each other?
For the modules to be connected to each other with the fast link-up function being enabled, are P1 and P2 connected with a cable?

Action
Replace the cable with an Ethernet cable compliant with the relevant standard. ( User's manual for the master/local module used)
Change the segment length to 100m or less.
Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable used, and correct the bending radius.
Replace the Ethernet cable.
Check that the power supplies of the other stations are turned on.
� Check that the power supply of the switching hub is turned on. � Check that the switching hub that meets the specifications of the master module in
use is used. ( User's manual for the master/local module used) � Disconnect Ethernet cables, and then reconnect them. � Power off and on the switching hub.
For the ports connected to each other, set the same state (enable/disable) for the fast link-up function. And then power off and on the modules. In addition, disable the fast link-up function for the port that is to be connected to the port where the fast link-up function is not supported.
Connect P1 and P2 with a cable when connecting modules where the fast link-up function is enabled.

If link-up processing is repeated due to a condition of a device on the line, it may take a longer time for the P1 LINK LED/P2 LINK LED to turn on. This phenomenon may be eliminated by changing the PORT of the relevant module to which the Ethernet cable is connected (example: PORT1PORT2). For details on Ethernet cable wiring, refer to the following. Page 131 Wiring of Ethernet Cable

189 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 Checking the LEDs

When the DATA LINK LED turns off

When the DATA LINK LED turns off, check the following items.

Check item Are Ethernet cables used compliant with the relevant standard?
Is the segment length 100m or less? Does the cabling condition (bending radius) meet the specifications? Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? Does the master station connected to the network operate normally?
Do other stations connected to the I/O module normally operate? Does the switching hub in use normally operate?
Is the station number of the I/O module duplicated with any of the other devices within the access range of CC-Link IE Field Network? Is function setting switch 1 turned on?
Are the IP address/station number setting switches set to a value other than 1 to 120? Is a device that is operating as a network other than CC-Link IE Field Network connected between the master station and the I/O module?

Action
Replace the cable with an Ethernet cable compliant with the relevant standard. ( User's manual for the master/local module used)
Change the segment length to 100m or less.
Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable used, and correct the bending radius.
Replace the Ethernet cable.
� If an error occurs in the master station, clear the error in the master station. � Check that the master station in use is a supported master station. ( Page 108
Applicable master station)
Check that the power supplies of the other stations are turned on.
� Check that the power supply of the switching hub is turned on. � Check that the switching hub that meets the specifications of the master module in
use is used. ( User's manual for the master/local module used) � Disconnect Ethernet cables, and then reconnect them. � Power off and on the switching hub.
Change the station number so that no station number duplication occurs in the access range of CC-Link IE Field Network.
Turn on function setting switch 1 if it is turned off, and turn off and on the module power supply.
For the station number, the effective range is 1 to 120. Change the station number to within the range from 1 to 120.
Disconnect a device that is not operating as CC-Link IE Field Network from the system. For a device that can be set to operate on CC-Link IE Field Network, make sure that it is operating as CC-Link IE Field Network.

When the DATA LINK LED flashes

When the DATA LINK LED flashes, check the following items.

Check item Does the station number of the I/O module match the station number specified in the network configuration settings of the master station or in the CC IE Field Configuration? Is the station type an intelligent device station?
Is the I/O module a reserved station?
Are the IP address/station number setting switches set to a value other than 1 to 120? Is link stop displayed in CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics? Has the connection been changed from the connected master station to a master station with a different network number?

Action
Match the station number of the I/O module with the station number on the master station.
In the network configuration settings of the master station, change "Station type" for the I/O module to "Intelligent device station". Change the setting of "Reserved/error invalid station" to a value other than "Reserved station" in the network configuration settings of the master station. For the station number, the effective range is 1 to 120. Change the station number to within the range from 1 to 120.
Check the link status in CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics, and start the link if the link is stopped.
� Reconnect to the previous master station. � To communicate with a master station with a different network number, power off
and on the I/O module.

190 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 Checking the LEDs

When the I/O PW LED does not turn on

When the I/O PW LED does not turn on, check the following items.

Check item

Action

Is the external power supply (24VDC) wired?
Is the external power supply (24VDC) turned on? Is the voltage of the external power supply (24VDC) within the specified range?

Wire the external power supply (24VDC). Turn on the external power supply (24VDC). Set the voltage value within the range of performance specifications.

191 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 Checking the LEDs

11.3 Unit Test
Run a unit test to check if there is any abnormality in the hardware of I/O module.
1. Power off the I/O module. 2. Connect P1 and P2 of the I/O module with an Ethernet cable. 3. Set the IP address/station number setting switches and the function setting switches as follows.
� IP address/station number setting switch (x1): Any position � IP address/station number setting switch (x16): F � Function setting switch 1: ON � Function setting switch 2 to function setting switch 10: Any position
4. Power on the I/O module. 5. Unit test begins.
The RUN LED flashes during the unit test.
6. The RUN LED turns on when the unit test is completed.
� If the test is completed normally, the ERR. LED does not turn on, but remains off. � If the test is completed with an error, the ERR. LED turns on. If the test is completed with an error, replace the Ethernet
cable and run the test again. If the test is completed with an error again, it may be due to a hardware error in the I/O module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
Precautions
If the I/O module is connected to the network while the IP address/station number setting switch (x16) is set to F, data link may not be properly performed on modules of other stations. Set an appropriate value for the IP address/station number setting switch (x16), and connect the I/O module to the network.
192 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.3 Unit Test

11.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

Perform troubleshooting by symptom when the I/O module does not operate properly even with no error. If an error occurs in the I/O module, identify the cause of the error using the engineering tool.

When the ON/OFF status of an external input cannot be read

When the ON/OFF status of an external input cannot be read, check the following items.

Check item Is the corresponding LED (X0 LED to X1F LED) of the I/O module on when an external input device is on?
When the LEDs from X0 LED to X1F LED are turned on, does the corresponding RX device turn on? On the network configuration settings, has the network synchronous communication setting (synchronous/asynchronous) or the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7 been changed? Is the inter-module synchronous interrupt program created when MELSEC iQ-R series modules use the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function together with the inter-module synchronization function? Is there any problem with other equipment such as the master station and connected devices?

Action
If the LED does not turn on, there is a problem on the input wiring. Check the wiring confirming that the input wiring is not disconnected or short-circuited, or the voltage of the input signal is correct. For the rated input voltage, check the Rated input voltage column of each I/O module specifications. Page 21 Input module Page 79 I/O combined module Refer to the following as well. Page 195 Troubleshooting for input circuit If the LED does not turn on even after the input wiring is corrected, the possible cause is an I/O module failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
If the RX device does not turn on, check and correct the refresh parameter so that the refresh device setting matches the corresponding setting in the program. For the refresh parameter setting, refer to the following. User's manual for the master station used
When the network synchronous communication setting or the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7 has been changed, turn off and on the power supply, or perform remote reset.
Create the inter-module synchronous interrupt program when MELSEC iQ-R series modules use the CCLink IE Field Network synchronous communication function together with the inter-module synchronization function. For the inter-module synchronous interrupt program, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Inter-Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual
If there is no problem with other equipment, the possible cause is an I/O module failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

193

When the ON/OFF status of an external output cannot be changed

When the ON/OFF status of an external output cannot be changed, check the following items.

Check item

Action

Is the I/O PW LED turned on?
When External output signal (RY0 to RY1F) is turned on, is the corresponding LED (Y0 LED to Y1F LED) of the I/O module turned on?
Has the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7 been changed while External output signal (RY0 to RY1F) is used?
Are signals output from the output terminal Y on which the LED (Y0 LED to Y1F LED) is on?
On the network configuration settings, has the network synchronous communication setting (synchronous/asynchronous) or the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7 been changed? Is the inter-module synchronous interrupt program created when MELSEC iQ-R series modules use the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function together with the inter-module synchronization function? Is RWw10 to RWw4F set for the refresh device setting while the module is operating in synchronization cycle timing control mode? Is the value set in Synchronization output timing setting Y OFF to ON/ON to OFF (RWw10 to RWw4F) exceeding the synchronization cycle while the module is operating in synchronization cycle timing control mode? Is the ON/OFF switching period of output set to be an interval shorter than the maximum output response time when the module uses synchronization cycle timing control mode? Is there any problem with other equipment such as the master station and connected devices?

Take corrective action according to the following. Page 191 When the I/O PW LED does not turn on
If the above LED is not turned on, check and correct the refresh parameter so that the refresh device setting matches the corresponding setting in the program. For the refresh parameter setting, refer to the following. User's manual for the master/local module used If the corresponding LED (Y0 LED to Y1F LED) of the I/O module is not turned on, there is a problem with the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7. When using External output signal (RY0 to RY1F), turn off both the function setting switch 6 and the function setting switch 7. In addition, turn off and on the power supply, or perform remote reset after changing the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7.
If signals are not output, there is a problem with the output wiring. Check the wiring confirming that the output wiring is not disconnected or short-circuited. Refer to the following as well. Page 198 Troubleshooting for output circuit When the network synchronous communication setting or the setting for function setting switch 6 or function setting switch 7 has been changed, turn off and on the power supply, or perform remote reset.
Create the inter-module synchronous interrupt program when MELSEC iQ-R series modules use the CCLink IE Field Network synchronous communication function together with the inter-module synchronization function. For the inter-module synchronous interrupt program, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Inter-Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual
There is a problem with the refresh device setting. Check and correct the refresh parameter so that the refresh device setting matches the corresponding setting in the program. If a value exceeding the synchronization cycle is set, an external output does not change. Correct the value so that a value set in Synchronization output timing setting Y OFF to ON/ON to OFF (RWw10 to RWw4F) is equal to or smaller than the synchronization cycle.
Because the module uses synchronization cycle timing control mode, if the ON/OFF switching period of output is set to be shorter than the maximum output response time, output may not turn on or off. Correct the values of Synchronization output timing setting Y OFF to ON or ON to OFF (RWw10 to RWw4F) so that the ON/OFF switching period becomes longer than the maximum output response time. If there is no problem with other equipment, the possible cause is an I/O module failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

When CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics cannot be performed

When CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics cannot be performed, check the following items.

Check item

Action

Is the version of the engineering tool supported? Check the version of the engineering tool, and if it is prior to the compatible versions, update it.

194

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

Troubleshooting for input circuit
This section describes the troubleshooting for input circuit.

An input signal does not turn off No.1

Cause

Drive by a switch with LED indicator

DC input (sink)

Leakage current

Input module

Action
Connect an appropriate resistor as shown below so that a current through the input module may become lower than the OFF current.
DC input (sink)

Resistor

Input module

For the calculation example of a resistor to be connected, refer to the following.
Calculation example
If the switch with LED indicator with maximum leakage current of 3mA when 24VDC external power supply is provided to the NZ2GN2B1-32D is connected

Leakage current 3mA Input module

24VDC
1. The OFF current of NZ2GN2B1-32D is not 1.5mA or lower. Therefore, connect a resistor as shown below.

3mA

IR=1.5mA

IZ=1.5mA Input impedance 3.0k

24VDC
2. To satisfy the condition that the OFF current of NZ2GN2B1-32D is 1.5mA or lower, the current through the connected
resistor should be 1.5mA or higher. From the formula below, the connected resistor (R) is lower than 3.0k.

IR: IZ = Z (Input impedance): R

IZ IR

� Z (Input impedance) =

1.5 1.5

� 3.0 = 3.0[k]

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

195

3. When the resistor (R) is 2.5k, for example, the power capacity (W) of the resistor (R) becomes 0.332W.

W = (Input voltage)2 � R = 28.82 � 2500 = 0.332[W]
4. Because the resistor requires a power capacity that is 3 to 5 times larger than the actual current consumption, the
resistor connected to the terminal should be 2.5k; and 1 to 2W.
5. OFF voltage when the resistor (R) is connected becomes 4.09V. This satisfies that the OFF voltage of NZ2GN2B1-32D
is 5V or lower.

� 3[mA] = 4.09[V]

1 2.5[k]

1 3.0[k]

196

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

An input signal does not turn off No.2
Cause
By using two power supplies, a sneak path is configured.
DC input

Input module

E1 > E2
Action
� Use one power supply. � To prevent the sneak path, connect a diode as shown below.
DC input

Input module

A signal incorrectly inputs data
Cause
Noise is taken as input data.
Action
� To prevent excessive noise, avoid installing power cables together with I/O cables. � Set a longer input response time. ( Page 152 Input Response Time Setting Function) � Connect surge absorbers to noise-generating devices such as relays and conductors using the same power supply or take
other noise reduction measures. � To prevent noise from being taken in, take measures to reduce noise for the I/O cable by using a part such as a ferrite core. � To prevent radiation noise, take measures to reduce noise by using a shielded cable.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

197

Troubleshooting for output circuit
This section describes the troubleshooting for output circuit.

A load momentarily turns on when the external power supply is powered on
Cause
An incorrect output occurs due to the stray capacitance (C) between collector and emitter of a photocoupler. (When a high sensitivity load (such as solid state relay) is used, this incorrect output may occur.)

Output module

Photocoupler

Tr1

Load

Constantvoltage circuit

CTL+ COM-

SW 24V

When the external power supply is powered on rapidly, the current (Ic) flows due to the stray capacitance(C). The current (Ic) flows to the gate of the transistor (Tr1) of the next stage and the output Y0 turns on for approximately 100s.

SW: External power supply (24V) at On

10ms or less

Output Y0

Approx.100s

198

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

Action
Before turning on or off the external power supply, check that the rise time of the external power supply is 10ms or more.
Then, install a switch (SW1) to the primary side of the external power supply.

Primary side

Secondary side

External power supply

SW1

Programmable controller

When installing the switch to the secondary side, connect a capacitor and resistor, and increase the rise time (10ms or more). � Sink output

Load

R1 CTL+
SW C1 COM-
24V
� Source output
Y0
Load

R1 CTL-
SW C1
COM+
24V
R1: Several tens of ohms Power capacity (External power supply current*1)2 Resistance value (3 to 5)*2 C1: Several hundreds of microfarads 50V (Example) R1 = 40, C1 = 300F Time constant is calculated as shown below. C1 R1 = 300 10- 6 40 = 12 10-3s = 12ms
*1 For details on the current consumption of the external power supply for output part to be used, refer to the performance specifications. *2 Select the power capacity of resistor to be 3 to 5 times as large as the actual power consumption.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

199

A load momentarily turns on from off when the system is powered off
Cause
When an inductive load is connected, [2] Load may turn on from off due to a diversion of back electromotive force at [1] Shutoff.

Output module Sink output
ON

+ Back electromotive- [3] force
Load
Y0

OFF

[2]
Load
Y1
[1] Shut off

COM-

CTL+

Output module Source output
ON

-Back electromotive + [3] force
Load
Y0

OFF

Y1
COM+ CTL-

[2]
Load
[1] Shut off

200

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

Action
Take one of the two actions shown below. Action 1. To suppress the back electromotive force, connect a diode parallel to the load where back electromotive force is generated. � Sink output [3]
Back electromotive force Load

� Source output [3]

Back electromotive

force

Load

Action 2. Configure a sneak current path by connecting a diode across positive and negative of the external power supply. When taking the action described in Example 1 at a time, connect a diode parallel to C1 and R1.

Sink output ON

Back electromotive

force

- [3]

Load

OFF

[2]
Load
Y1 [1]
Shut off

COMCTL+

D1 C1 R1
Example 1

Source output

Back electromotive

force

[3]

Load

OFF

[2]
Load
Y1 [1]
Shut off

COM+ CTL-

D1 C1 R1
Example 1

D1: Reverse voltage VR (VRM)*1 Forward current IF (IFM)*2
*1 Approximately 10 times the rated voltage in the specifications Example: 24VDC Approx. 200VDC
*2 Twice the maximum load current (common) in the performance specifications or more Example: 5A/1 common 10A or more

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

201

When the output module is off, the LED connected as a load dimly turns on
Cause
The load operates by the leakage current when the output module is off.

Output module Sink output

Countermeasure Y0

LED

COM-

24VDC power supply

Action
Connect a resistor of 5 to 50k in parallel with the LED load.

When a digital display unit is connected as a load, data may not be displayed normally
Cause
The load operates by the leakage current when the output module is off.

Output module Sink output

Digital display unit Countermeasure (input signal section)

Y0
CTL+ COM-

24VDC power supply

Dedicated IC

Action
Install a pull-up resistor of 5 to 50k and 0.5W between the outputs of 24VDC power supply and the output module.

202

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

When output is turned on, load connected to other outputs is turned on simultaneously
Cause
When a non-wiring state occurs due to, for example, a shutoff or disconnection between 0V of the external power supply and the common of a load, a current flows across the load that is off through an unexpected circuit of the output element that is off.

Output module Source output

Output control

circuit

Load Y0

OFF

Output control circuit

Load Y1

COM+ CTL-

24VDC

Shutoff or disconnection

Action
Connect external power supply and the load correctly. To prevent the state described above, install diodes in each output terminal as shown below.
Source output
Load
Y0
Load
Y1

COM+ CTL-

24VDC

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

203

A load operates only by turning on the external power supply (transistor output)
Cause
� The external power supply is connected with its polarity reversed.

Sink output Y0
COMOutput element protection diode

Load

Incorrect Correct
External power supply

Source output Y0
COM+

Load

Incorrect Correct
External power supply

Output element protection diode
� The reversed polarity may allow current to flow via the output element protection diode into the load.

Action
Connect the external power supply with the correct polarity.

204

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Examples of Troubles with the I/O Module

11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

Error codes can be checked by any of the following methods: � Checking with the engineering tool � Checking by Error code (RWr1) � Checking by using CC IE Field configuration

Checking with the engineering tool

The error history held in the I/O module can be read. Errors that occurred before powering-off can be checked as well.

The error history can be checked by using CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics.

� The error history records a maximum of 15 errors in reverse chronological order of occurrence. If more than 15 errors occur, errors are deleted from the oldest.
� If the same error occurs continuously, only the error that occurred first is stored to the error history. � The error history is stored in the non-volatile memory in the I/O module. It is not lost when the power is cut
off. However, when the upper limit for the number of writes to the non-volatile memory is reached, the error history cannot be stored in the non-volatile memory. � "Occurrence Date" information in the error history is recorded after clock information is distributed from the master station. When an error occurs before clock information is distributed from the master station, "Occurrence Date" information is not recorded.
Checking by using CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics
Operating procedure 1. Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module. 2. Start CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics from the menu.
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics]
3. Right-click the slave station whose error history you want to check, and select "Error History". 4. Follow the on-screen instructions and click the [Yes] button. 5. The error history appears.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

205

Checking by Error code (RWr1)
Check the latest error code with the remote register of the master/local module.
Operating procedure
[Online] [Monitor] [Device/Buffer Memory Batch]
Ex. When the refresh target device for Error code (RWr1) is W101

How to clear an error
How to clear an error depends on the error type.

Error type Major error Moderate error
Minor error
Communication error

How to clear an error
The error cannot be cleared. Eliminate the error cause, and power off and on the I/O module. Or, turn on and off Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10).
Eliminate the error cause, and power off and on the I/O module. Or, turn on and off Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10).
Eliminate the error cause. The error does not need to be cleared.

Communication errors are not stored in the error code, but stored only in the error history.

206

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

How to clear an error using the command execution of slave station.
Follow the procedure below to clear an error using the command execution of slave station.
Operating procedure 1. Select an I/O module from the station list on the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. 2. Open the "Command Execution of Slave Station" window.
Right-click on the target I/O module [Online] [Command Execution of Slave Station]
11
3. Set "Method selection" to "Error clear request", and click the [Execute] button.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

207

4. When the following window appears, click the [OK] button.
5. An error on the I/O module is cleared. Checking by using CC IE Field configuration
How to check an error using the command execution of slave station
Follow the procedure below to check an error using the command execution of slave station.
Operating procedure 1. Select an I/O module from the station list on the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. 2. Open the "Command Execution of Slave Station" window.
Right-click on the target I/O module [Online] [Command Execution of Slave Station]

208

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

3. Set "Method selection" to "Error history read" and click the [Execute] button.
11
4. When the following windows appear, click the [Yes] button.
5. When the following window appears, click the [OK] button.

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

209

6. The error history of the I/O module is displayed in "Execution Result".
To initialize the error history, set "Method selection" to "Error history clear request" on the "Command Execution of Slave Station" window and click the [Execute] button.

210

11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.6 Method for Checking Error Codes

11.7 Error Code List

The error codes are classified into the following three types.

Classification Major error Moderate error Minor error

Description An error that cannot be recovered. The RUN LED turns off. An error where the module cannot continue to operate. The ERR. LED turns on. An error where the module can continue to operate. The ERR. LED flashes.

I/O module error codes are as follows.

Error code 0010H 0100H
0101H 0102H
0103H 0104H
0106H 0107H 0200H 0201H 0202H 0203H 0204H 0205H

Error type Major error Moderate error
Moderate error Moderate error
Moderate error Moderate error
Moderate error Moderate error Minor error Minor error Minor error Minor error Minor error Minor error

Error name

Description and cause

Action

Hardware error

Module hardware error

Power off and on the module power supply. If this error occurs again, the possible cause is a module failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

RWw/RWr setting error

When "Network Synchronous Communication" in the network configuration settings is set to "Synchronous", System area (RWw3/RWr3) is not set in "RWw/ RWr Setting".

Correct the RWw/RWr setting of the network configuration setting to assign the System area (RWw3/RWr3), and turn off and on the module power supply or perform remote reset.

Synchronization cycle setting error

The synchronization cycle set in the master station is not supported by the I/O module.

Check the synchronization cycle of the master station, and then turn off and on the power supply of the I/O module or perform remote reset.

Synchronous communication error 1

Synchronous communication with the master station has failed for a certain period of time.

Take any of the following actions, and then turn off and on the power supply of the I/O module or perform remote reset. � For the synchronization cycle setting for the master
station, set a long cycle. � Reduce the number of slave stations operating with the
CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function. � Take measures against noise on the transmission path.

Synchronous communication error 2

Synchronous communication with the master station has failed for a certain period of time.

Take measures against noise on the transmission path, and then turn off and on the module power supply of I/O module, or perform remote reset.

External power supply OFF error

The external power supply voltage turns off.

� Check the state of the external power supply. � Check if the power supply voltage satisfies the
specifications for the I/O module. � Correct the timing of turning on or off External power
supply monitor request (RWw2.b9) if an error occurs when starting or stopping the system.

IP address/station number setting switch out of range error

The IP address/station number setting switches are set outside the range of 1 to 120.

Turn on the power supply with the IP address/station number setting switches set to a value in the range 1 to 120.

MODE switch incorrect The MODE switch is set to an incorrect state.

Set the MODE switch correctly.

IP address/station number setting switch changed error

An IP address/station number setting switch has been changed with the module power supply on.

Return the IP address/station number setting switch to the setting it had when the module was powered on.

Function setting switch 1 changed error

The function setting switch 1 has been changed with the module power supply on.

Return the function setting switch 1 to the setting when the module power supply was on.

Function setting switch 2 changed error

The function setting switch 2 has been changed with the module power supply on.

Return the function setting switch 2 to the setting when the module power supply was on.

Function setting switch 3 changed error

The function setting switch 3 has been changed with the module power supply on.

Return the function setting switch 3 to the setting when the module power supply was on.

Function setting switch 4 changed error

The function setting switch 4 has been changed with the module power supply on.

Return the function setting switch 4 to the setting when the module power supply was on.

Function setting switch 5 changed error

The function setting switch 5 has been changed with the module power supply on.

Return the function setting switch 5 to the setting when the module power supply was on.

211 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.7 Error Code List

Error code 0206H 0207H 0208H 0209H 020AH 0220H 0240H 0251H
0260H
0261H 0270H
D0E2H D0E3H D217H D2A0H
D2A3H DF01H

Error type Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Minor error
Communication error Communication error Communication error Communication error
Communication error Communication error

Error name Function setting switch 6 changed error
Function setting switch 7 changed error
Function setting switch 8 changed error
Function setting switch 9 changed error
Function setting switch 10 changed error
Error history save limit error
Module power supply voltage drop error
Non-volatile memory access error (error history)
Remote buffer memory access error
Incorrect network parameter access error Remote reset disable error
Station number in use (own station)
Own station No. out of range
Transient data request command error Receive buffer full
Transient data length error Transient data divided error

Description and cause The function setting switch 6 has been changed with the module power supply on. The function setting switch 7 has been changed with the module power supply on. The function setting switch 8 has been changed with the module power supply on. The function setting switch 9 has been changed with the module power supply on. The function setting switch 10 has been changed with the module power supply on. The upper limit for the number of times an error is saved in the error history is reached. The module power supply voltage is dropped.
The error cannot be saved because an error in access to the non-volatile memory was detected.
An area other than the remote buffer memory areas has been accessed using the REMFR/ REMTO/REMFRD/REMTOD instruction. I/O module was accessed when network parameter was in the incorrect status. Remote reset could not be performed because the setting of the NETWORK switch is different from the setting it had when the module was powered on. The setting of the IP address/ station number setting switches is incorrect. The network parameter is incorrect or outside the range.
The transient data request command is incorrect. The target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data.
The received transient data is incorrect. Divided transient data has been received.

Action Return the function setting switch 6 to the setting when the module power supply was on.
Return the function setting switch 7 to the setting when the module power supply was on.
Return the function setting switch 8 to the setting when the module power supply was on.
Return the function setting switch 9 to the setting when the module power supply was on.
Return the function setting switch 10 to the setting when the module power supply was on.
No more errors can be saved in the error history. Check the error by the latest error code.
� Check the state of the module power supply. � Check if the power supply voltage satisfies the
specifications for the I/O module. � An error that occurred at the time of or before this error
may not be saved into the non-volatile memory. � Take measures against noise with a shielded cable for
connection. � If this error occurs again, the possible cause is a module
failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. Correct the setting data of the REMFR/REMTO/REMFRD/ REMTOD instruction to access the remote buffer memory area range.
Set network parameter again correctly.
Return the NETWORK switch to the setting it had when the module was powered on, and then perform remote reset again.
Set a unique station number. After taking the above action, turn off and on or reset all the stations where this error has been detected. Add the station information of the module in the network configuration settings of the master station (submaster station). Correct the request command at the transient request source, and retry the operation. � Check the network status using the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-
Link IE Field diagnostics of the engineering tool, and take corrective action. � When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data, send the data from the send source after some time has passed. Correct the amount of data (frame length) at the transient request source, and retry the operation. Send the transient data that is not divided.

212 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11.7 Error Code List

APPENDICES

Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal
List of remote I/O signals
I/O signals for a master/local module are listed as follows. The I/O signals in this section are the examples with the start of remote I/O signals of the I/O module assigned to the device number of RX0 and RY0. Remote input (RX) indicates the input signal from the I/O module to the master/local module. Remote output (RY) indicates the output signal from the master/local module to the I/O module.

Do not use any "Use prohibited" remote I/O signals. Doing so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

Input module (16-point module)

Remote input signal

Device number

Name

RX0

External input signal X0

RX1

External input signal X1

RX2

External input signal X2

RX3

External input signal X3

RX4

External input signal X4

RX5

External input signal X5

RX6

External input signal X6

RX7

External input signal X7

RX8

External input signal X8

RX9

External input signal X9

RXA

External input signal XA

RXB

External input signal XB

RXC

External input signal XC

RXD

External input signal XD

RXE

External input signal XE

RXF

External input signal XF

Remote output signal

Device number RY0 to RYF

Name Use prohibited

213 APPX
Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

Input module (32-point module)
Remote input signal
Device number RX0 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 RX9 RXA RXB RXC RXD RXE RXF RX10 RX11 RX12 RX13 RX14 RX15 RX16 RX17 RX18 RX19 RX1A RX1B RX1C RX1D RX1E RX1F
Remote output signal
Device number RY0 to RY1F

Name External input signal X0 External input signal X1 External input signal X2 External input signal X3 External input signal X4 External input signal X5 External input signal X6 External input signal X7 External input signal X8 External input signal X9 External input signal XA External input signal XB External input signal XC External input signal XD External input signal XE External input signal XF External input signal X10 External input signal X11 External input signal X12 External input signal X13 External input signal X14 External input signal X15 External input signal X16 External input signal X17 External input signal X18 External input signal X19 External input signal X1A External input signal X1B External input signal X1C External input signal X1D External input signal X1E External input signal X1F
Name Use prohibited

214 APPX Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

Output module (16-point module)
Remote input signal
Device number RX0 to RXF
Remote output signal
Device number RY0 RY1 RY2 RY3 RY4 RY5 RY6 RY7 RY8 RY9 RYA RYB RYC RYD RYE RYF

215 APPX
Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

Output module (32-point module)
Remote input signal
Device number RX0 to RX1F
Remote output signal
Device number RY0 RY1 RY2 RY3 RY4 RY5 RY6 RY7 RY8 RY9 RYA RYB RYC RYD RYE RYF RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15 RY16 RY17 RY18 RY19 RY1A RY1B RY1C RY1D RY1E RY1F

Name Use prohibited
Name External output signal Y0 External output signal Y1 External output signal Y2 External output signal Y3 External output signal Y4 External output signal Y5 External output signal Y6 External output signal Y7 External output signal Y8 External output signal Y9 External output signal YA External output signal YB External output signal YC External output signal YD External output signal YE External output signal YF External output signal Y10 External output signal Y11 External output signal Y12 External output signal Y13 External output signal Y14 External output signal Y15 External output signal Y16 External output signal Y17 External output signal Y18 External output signal Y19 External output signal Y1A External output signal Y1B External output signal Y1C External output signal Y1D External output signal Y1E External output signal Y1F

216 APPX Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

I/O combined module (16-point module)
Remote input signal
Device number RX0 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 to RXF
Remote output signal
Device number RY0 to RY7 RY8 RY9 RYA RYB RYC RYD RYE RYF

217 APPX
Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

I/O combined module (32-point module)
Remote input signal
Device number RX0 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 RX9 RXA RXB RXC RXD RXE RXF RX10 to RX1F
Remote output signal
Device number RY0 to RYF RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15 RY16 RY17 RY18 RY19 RY1A RY1B RY1C RY1D RY1E RY1F

Name External input signal X0 External input signal X1 External input signal X2 External input signal X3 External input signal X4 External input signal X5 External input signal X6 External input signal X7 External input signal X8 External input signal X9 External input signal XA External input signal XB External input signal XC External input signal XD External input signal XE External input signal XF Use prohibited
Name Use prohibited External output signal Y10 External output signal Y11 External output signal Y12 External output signal Y13 External output signal Y14 External output signal Y15 External output signal Y16 External output signal Y17 External output signal Y18 External output signal Y19 External output signal Y1A External output signal Y1B External output signal Y1C External output signal Y1D External output signal Y1E External output signal Y1F

218 APPX Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

Details of remote input signals
The following describes the details of the remote input signals for the master/local module.

External input signal

Device number

Name External input signal X0 to external input signal X1F

Device number RX0 to RX1F

Description
This signal shows the on/off status of the external input of input module and I/O combined module.

When a major or moderate error occurs in the I/O module, the external input signal turns off.

Details of remote output signals
The following describes the details of the remote output signals for the master/local module.

External output signal

Device number

Name External output signal Y0 to external output signal Y1F

Device number RY0 to RY1F

Description
This signal turns on/off the external output of output module and I/O combined module.

When a major or moderate error occurs in the I/O module, external output turns off, regardless of the status of

the external output signal.

In addition, when either of the following conditions is applied, due to the output HOLD/CLEAR setting function,

external output may operate differently than the status of the external output signal.

� The I/O module is disconnected from the data link.

� The operation status of the CPU module is STOP or it is suspended by an error.

For details on the output HOLD/CLEAR setting function, refer to the following.

Page 153 Output HOLD/CLEAR Setting Function

219 APPX
Appendix 1 Remote I/O Signal

Appendix 2 Remote Register

List of remote registers
This section lists remote registers for a master/local module. The remote registers shown are the examples with the start of remote registers of the I/O module assigned to the device number of RWr0 and RWw0. Remote register (RWr) is the information input from the I/O module to the master/local module. Remote register (RWw) is the information output from the master/local module to the I/O module.

Input module (16-point module)

Remote register (RWr)

Device number

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 to RWrF RWr10
RWr11
RWr2E
RWr2F

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Use prohibited

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.

Remote register (RWw)

Device number

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

RWw0 RWw1 to RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 to RWw2F

Module operation area Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.

Module operation area Use prohibited Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF
Synchronization input timing information XF OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information XF ON to OFF
Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module operation area Use prohibited Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited

220 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Input module (32-point module)

Remote register (RWr)

Device number
RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 to RWrF RWr10 RWr11 RWr4E RWr4F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited
Use prohibited

Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF
Synchronization input timing information X1F OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information X1F ON to OFF

*1 The area is used for the system.

Remote register (RWw)

Device number
RWw0 RWw1 to RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 to RWw4F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used
Module operation area Use prohibited Use prohibited

Synchronous X/Y control mode Synchronization cycle timing

control mode

Module operation area

Use prohibited

Use prohibited*1

Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.

221 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Output module (16-point module)

Remote register (RWr)

Device number
RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 to RWr9 RWrA RWrB RWrC RWrD RWrE RWrF to RWr2F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y current value Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF Use prohibited

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.
Remote register (RWw)

Device number
RWw0 RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 to RWwB RWwC
RWwD RWwE
RWwF RWw10
RWw11
RWw2E
RWw2F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y0 to YF Use prohibited Use prohibited

Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y0 to YF Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y0 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y0 to YF Use prohibited Synchronization output timing setting Y0 OFF to ON Synchronization output timing setting Y0 ON to OFF
Synchronization output timing setting YF OFF to ON Synchronization output timing setting YF ON to OFF

*1 The area is used for the system.

222 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Output module (32-point module)

Remote register (RWr)

Device number
RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 to RWr9 RWrA RWrB RWrC RWrD RWrE RWrF RWr10 to RWr4F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y current value Y0 to YF Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F Output Y ON information Y0 to YF Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y0 to YF Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F Output Y ON information Y0 to YF Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y0 to YF Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F Output Y ON information Y0 to YF Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.
Remote register (RWw)

Device number
RWw0 RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 to RWwB RWwC RWwD RWwE RWwF RWw10 RWw11 RWw4E RWw4F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode Synchronization cycle timing control mode

Module operation area

Use prohibited

Function selection setting area

Use prohibited

Use prohibited*1

Use prohibited

Output Y ON information clear request Y0 to YF

Output Y ON information clear request Y10 to Y1F

Output Y OFF information clear request Output Y OFF information clear request Output Y OFF information clear request

Y0 to YF

Output Y OFF information clear request Output Y OFF information clear request Output Y OFF information clear request

Y10 to Y1F

Use prohibited

Synchronization output timing setting Y0 OFF to ON

Use prohibited

Synchronization output timing setting Y0 ON to OFF

Use prohibited

Synchronization output timing setting Y1F OFF to ON

Use prohibited

Synchronization output timing setting Y1F ON to OFF

*1 The area is used for the system.

223 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

I/O combined module (16-point module)

Remote register (RWr)

Device number
RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 to RWr9 RWrA RWrB RWrC RWrD RWrE RWrF RWr10
RWr11
RWr1E
RWr1F
RWr20 to RWr2F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y current value Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Use prohibited

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited
Use prohibited

Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y8 to Y1F Use prohibited Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF
Synchronization input timing information X7 OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information X7 ON to OFF Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.
Remote register (RWw)

Device number
RWw0 RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 to RWwB RWwC
RWwD RWwE
RWwF to RWw1F RWw20
RWw21
RWw2E
RWw2F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y8 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y8 to YF Use prohibited Use prohibited

Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y8 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y8 to YF Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited
Use prohibited

Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y8 to YF Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y8 to YF Use prohibited Synchronization output timing setting Y8 OFF to ON Synchronization output timing setting Y8 ON to OFF
Synchronization output timing setting YF OFF to ON Synchronization output timing setting YF ON to OFF

*1 The area is used for the system.

224 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

I/O combined module (32-point module)

Remote register (RWr)

Device number
RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 to RWrA RWrB RWrC RWrD RWrE RWrF RWr10
RWr11
RWr2E
RWr2F
RWr30 to RWr4F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited

Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited

Use prohibited
Use prohibited

Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module status area Error code Function selection status area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F Synchronization input timing information X0 OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information X0 ON to OFF
Synchronization input timing information XF OFF to ON Synchronization input timing information XF ON to OFF Use prohibited

*1 The area is used for the system.
Remote register (RWw)

Device number
RWw0 RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 to RWwC RWwD
RWwE RWwF
RWw10 to RWw2F RWw30
RWw31
RWw4E
RWw4F

Name

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function

Not used

Synchronous X/Y control mode

Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Use prohibited

Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited
Use prohibited

Use prohibited Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Synchronization cycle timing control mode Module operation area Use prohibited Function selection setting area Use prohibited*1 Use prohibited Output Y ON information clear request Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Output Y OFF information clear request Y10 to Y1F Use prohibited Synchronization output timing setting Y10 OFF to ON Synchronization output timing setting Y10 ON to OFF
Synchronization output timing setting Y1F OFF to ON Synchronization output timing setting Y1F ON to OFF

*1 The area is used for the system.

225 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Details of remote registers

Module status area
Device number
Name Module status area
Description
This area is intended for module status checking.
RWr0 b0 to b9 b10 b11 to b15

Device number RWr0
Name Use prohibited Error flag Use prohibited

Error flag (RWr0.b10)
Turning on Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10) after eliminating the cause of the error changes the error code (RWr1) to 0. Some error cannot be cleared with Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10) depending on its details. � Operation in the event of a minor error

Error flag (RWr0.b10)

OFF

Error code (RWr1)

0000H

Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10)

OFF

(Error code) ON

I/O control status

Performed by I/O module Executed by the program
� Operation in the event of a moderate error

Error flag (RWr0.b10)

OFF

Control performed

0000H

Error code (RWr1)

0000H

Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10)

OFF

I/O control status

Control performed

Performed by I/O module Executed by the program

(Error code) ON
Control stopped

0000H Control performed

226 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Error code
Device number
Name Error code
Description
The error code is stored. ( Page 211 Error Code List)

Device number RWr1

When multiple errors have occurred, these errors are stored in the error code (RWr1) in the following priority. � When the error type differs, they are stored in the order of major error > moderate error > minor error. � When the error type is the same, the error that occurred later is stored. � Communication errors are not stored.

Method for clearing an error
The method for clearing an error depends on the error type.

Error type Major error Moderate error
Minor error
Communication error

Clearing an error
The error cannot be cleared. Eliminate the error cause, and power off and on the I/O module. Or, turn on and off Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10).
Eliminate the error cause, and power off and on the I/O module. Or, turn on and off Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10).
Eliminate the error cause. The error does not need to be cleared.

Communication errors are not stored in the error code, but stored only in the error history.
A

227 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Function selection status area

Device number

Name Function selection status area

Description
The setting status of the function is shown.

Function selection status area

RWr2

Input module

b0 to b2

Input response setting status

Use prohibited

b4, b5

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status

Fast link-up setting status (PORT1)

Fast link-up setting status (PORT2)

Use prohibited

b10 to b15

Use prohibited

Device number RWr2
Output module Use prohibited Output HOLD/CLEAR setting status CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status Fast link-up setting status (PORT1) Fast link-up setting status (PORT2) Use prohibited External power supply monitor status Use prohibited

I/O combined module Input response setting status Output HOLD/CLEAR setting status CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status Fast link-up setting status (PORT1) Fast link-up setting status (PORT2) Use prohibited External power supply monitor status Use prohibited

Input response setting status (RWr2.b0 to RWr2.b2)
The setting status of the input response setting function is shown.

Value in RWr2.b2 Off Off Off Off On On On On

Value in RWr2.b1 Off Off On On Off Off On On

Value in RWr2.b0 Off On Off On Off On Off On

Setting status 1ms 0ms 0.2ms 1.5ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms

Output HOLD/CLEAR setting status (RWr2.b3)
The setting status of the output HOLD/CLEAR setting function is shown.

Value for RWr2.b3

Setting status

Off

CLEAR

HOLD

CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status (RWr2.b4, RWr2.b5)
The setting status of the CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function is shown.

Value for RWr2.b5
Off Off On On

Value for RWr2.b4
Off On Off On

Network Synchronous Communication Asynchronous Synchronous Synchronous Asynchronous

Operation mode
Synchronous X/Y control mode Synchronization cycle timing control mode

Fast link-up setting status (PORT1) (RWr2.b6)
The setting status of the fast link-up setting status (PORT1) is shown.

Value for RWr2.b6 Off On

Setting status Disable Enable

228 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Fast link-up setting status (PORT2) (RWr2.b7)
The setting status of the fast link-up setting status (PORT2) is shown.

Value for RWr2.b7

Setting status

Off

Disable

Enable

External power supply monitor status (RWr2.b9)
The setting status of the external power supply monitoring function is shown.

Value for RWr2.b9

Setting status

Off

Disable

Enable

Output Y current value
Device number

Name Output Y current value

Device number RWrA, RWrB

Description
� Actual on/off status of output Y can be checked by using Output Y current value Y (RWrA, RWrB). � The amount of time delay from when Output Y current value Y (RWrA, RWrB) changes until the external output
accordingly changes is no more than the maximum output response time.

Output Y current value Y0 to YF (RWrA)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Off: Output Y is off.

On: Output Y is on.
Output Y current value Y10 to Y1F (RWrB)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Y1F

Y1E

Y1D

Y1C

Y1B

Y1A

Y19

Y18

Y17

Y16

Y15

Y14

Y13

Y12

Y11

Y10

Off: Output Y is off. On: Output Y is on.

229 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Output Y ON information
Device number

Name Output Y ON information

Device number RWrC, RWrD

Description
Whether output Y has been turned on or not can be checked with Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD).

Output Y ON information Y0 to YF (RWrC)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Off: Output Y has never been turned on. On: Output Y has been turned on.

Output Y ON information Y10 to Y1F (RWrD)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Y1F

Y1E

Y1D

Y1C

Y1B

Y1A

Y19

Y18

Y17

Y16

Y15

Y14

Y13

Y12

Y11

Y10

Off: Output Y has never been turned on. On: Output Y has been turned on.
Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD) can be cleared using Output Y ON information clear request Y (RWwC,
RWwD).

ON Remote output signal RY0 OFF

Output Y current value Y0

(RWrA. b0)

OFF

External output signal Y0

OFF

Output Y ON information Y0

(RWrC.b0)

OFF

Output Y ON information clear request Y0 (RWwC.b0) OFF
Performed by I/O module Executed by the program (1) Remains on even after Y0 turns off. (2) Turns off when the clear request turns on.

ON ON
(1)

(2) ON

While Output Y ON information clear request is turned on, regardless of the remote output signal status, output Y ON information continues to be cleared.

230 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Output Y OFF information
Device number

Name Output Y OFF information

Device number RWrE, RWrF

Description
Whether output Y has been turned off or not can be checked with Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF).

Output Y OFF information Y0 to YF (RWrE)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Off: Output Y has never been turned off. On: Output Y has been turned off.

Output Y OFF information Y10 to Y1F (RWrF)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Y1F

Y1E

Y1D

Y1C

Y1B

Y1A

Y19

Y18

Y17

Y16

Y15

Y14

Y13

Y12

Y11

Y10

Off: Output Y has never been turned off. On: Output Y has been turned off.
Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF) can be cleared using Output Y OFF information clear request Y (RWwE,
RWwF).

ON Remote output signal RY0

OFF

ON Output Y current value Y0 (RWrA. b0)
ON External output signal Y0

Output Y OFF information Y0

(RWrE.b0)

OFF

OFF
OFF ON

A
(2)

(1)

Output Y OFF information

clear request Y0 (RWwE.b0) OFF

Performed by I/O module Executed by the program (1) Remains on even after Y0 turns on. (2) Turns off when the clear request turns on.

While Output Y OFF information clear request is turned on, regardless of the remote output signal status, output Y OFF information continues to be cleared.

231 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Synchronization input timing information

Device number

Name Synchronization input timing information X

Device number RWr10 to RWr4F

Description
When the synchronization cycle timing control mode is used, the input timing relative to the synchronization cycle start timing is stored. The time when the input has changed from OFF to ON, or from ON to OFF in one synchronization cycle is stored. When the input has changed multiple times in one synchronization cycle, the time of first change is stored.

Stored value
The value indicates the amount of time (unit: 0.1s) that has passed from the synchronization cycle start timing to the input change. The following table lists the stored values.

Stored value 0 to 65534 (0000H to FFFEH) 65535 (FFFFH)

Description Shows that the input has changed at the timing of stored value. Shows that the input has not changed within the synchronization cycle.

Module operation area
Device number
Name Module operation area
Description
This area is intended for module operation.
RWw0 b0 to b9 b10 b11 to b15

Device number RWw0
Name Use prohibited Error clear request flag Use prohibited

Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10)
For operation of the error clear request flag (RWw0.b10), refer to the following.
Page 226 Error flag (RWr0.b10)

232 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Function selection setting area

Device number

Name Function selection setting area

Description
Whether to enable or disable the function is set.

Function selection setting area

RWw2

Input module

b0 to b8

Use prohibited

b10 to b15

Device number RWw2
Output module Use prohibited External power supply monitor request Use prohibited

External power supply monitor request (RWw2.b9)
Whether to enable or disable the external power supply monitoring function is set.

Value for RWw2.b9

Setting

Off

Disable

Enable

I/O combined module Use prohibited External power supply monitor request Use prohibited

233 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Output Y ON information clear request
Device number

Name Output Y ON information clear request

Device number RWwC, RWwD

Description
This remote register is used to clear Output Y ON information Y (RWrC, RWrD). ( Page 167 Output ON information)

Output Y ON information clear request Y0 to YF (RWwC)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Off: Output Y ON information is not cleared. On: Output Y ON information is cleared.

Output Y ON information clear request Y10 to Y1F (RWwD)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Y1F

Y1E

Y1D

Y1C

Y1B

Y1A

Y19

Y18

Y17

Y16

Y15

Y14

Y13

Y12

Y11

Y10

Off: Output Y ON information is not cleared. On: Output Y ON information is cleared.

Output Y OFF information clear request
Device number

Name Output Y OFF information clear request

Device number RWwE, RWwF

Description
This remote register is used to clear Output Y OFF information Y (RWrE, RWrF). ( Page 167 Output OFF information)

Output Y OFF information clear request Y0 to YF (RWwE)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Off: Output Y OFF information is not cleared. On: Output Y OFF information is cleared.

Output Y OFF information clear request Y10 to Y1F (RWwF)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

Y1F

Y1E

Y1D

Y1C

Y1B

Y1A

Y19

Y18

Y17

Y16

Y15

Y14

Y13

Y12

Y11

Y10

Off: Output Y OFF information is not cleared. On: Output Y OFF information is cleared.

234 APPX Appendix 2 Remote Register

Synchronization output timing setting

Device number

Name Synchronization output timing setting Y

Device number RWw10 to RWw4F

Description
When the synchronization cycle timing control mode is used, set the output timing relative to the synchronization cycle start timing. Set the timing to change the output from OFF to ON, or from ON to OFF in one synchronization cycle. If the values set in Synchronization output timing setting Y OFF to ON (RWw10, RWw12, ... , RWw4C, RWw4E) and Synchronization output timing setting Y ON to OFF (RWw11, RWw13, ... , RWw4D, RWw4F) are the same for one output, the output does not change. If a set value is longer than the synchronization cycle, the output also does not change.

Setting value
Set the time (unit: 0.1s) taken from the synchronization cycle start timing to the output change.
The following table lists the setting values.

Setting value 0 to 65534 (0000H to FFFEH) 65535 (FFFFH)

Description The output changes at preset timing. The output does not change.

235 APPX
Appendix 2 Remote Register

Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory
This section describes the remote buffer memory. The remote buffer memory consists of addresses for the error history area and module control data area.

� For a single I/O module, do not execute multiple dedicated instructions at the same time. If multiple dedicated instructions are executed at the same time, the I/O module may be unable to receive the dedicated instructions, and the dedicated instructions may time out.
� Do not read or write data from/to any "Use prohibited" remote buffer memory areas. Otherwise, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

List of remote buffer memory areas

This section describes the details of remote buffer memory addresses of the I/O module. The remote buffer memory areas of the I/O module are assigned as shown below. : Access permitted, : Access not permitted

Remote buffer memory address

Decimal

Hexadecimal

0 to 2559 2560 to 2799
2800 to 4095 4096, 4097 4098 to 5375 5376 to 65535

0000H to 09FFH 0A00H to 0AEFH
0AF0H to 0FFFH 1000H, 1001H 1002H to 14FFH 1500H to FFFFH

Area name
Use prohibited Error history area Module control data area Use prohibited

Target
Station-based error history data Use prohibited Station-based control data Use prohibited

Access method CC IE Field configuration of the engineering tool *2

*1 For the REMFR, REMFRD, REMTO, and REMTOD instructions, refer to the following manual. User's manual for the master/local module used
*2 For details on the access method, refer to the following. Page 205 Method for Checking Error Codes

REMFR instruction, REMFRD instruction, REMTO instruction, REMTOD instruction*1

236 APPX Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory

Error history area

Error history data

Remote buffer memory address

Name

Default value*1 Read/Write

Decimal

Hexadecimal

2560

0A00H

Error history data 1

Error code

0000H

2561

0A01H

Order of occurrence

0000H

2562

0A02H

[Error time] Western

0000H

calendar year

2563

0A03H

[Error time] Month/Day

0000H

2564

0A04H

[Error time] Hour/Minute 0000H

2565

0A05H

[Error time] Second/00H 0000H

(fixed)

2566

0A06H

Error code details 1

0000H

2567

0A07H

Error code details 2

0000H

2568

0A08H

Error code details 3

0000H

2569

0A09H

Error code details 4

0000H

2570

0A0AH

Error code details 5

0000H

2571

0A0BH

Error code details 6

0000H

2572

0A0CH

Error code details 7

0000H

2573

0A0DH

Error code details 8

0000H

2574

0A0EH

Error code details 9

0000H

2575

0A0FH

Error code details 10

0000H

2576 to 2591

0A10H to 0A1FH

Error history data 2

Same as Error history data 1

2592 to 2607

0A20H to 0A2FH

Error history data 3

Same as Error history data 1

2608 to 2623

0A30H to 0A3FH

Error history data 4

Same as Error history data 1

2624 to 2639

0A40H to 0A4FH

Error history data 5

Same as Error history data 1

2640 to 2655

0A50H to 0A5FH

Error history data 6

Same as Error history data 1

2656 to 2671

0A60H to 0A6FH

Error history data 7

Same as Error history data 1

2672 to 2687

0A70H to 0A7FH

Error history data 8

Same as Error history data 1

2688 to 2703

0A80H to 0A8FH

Error history data 9

Same as Error history data 1

2704 to 2719

0A90H to 0A9FH

Error history data 10

Same as Error history data 1

2720 to 2735

0AA0H to 0AAFH

Error history data 11

Same as Error history data 1

2736 to 2751

0AB0H to 0ABFH

Error history data 12

Same as Error history data 1

2752 to 2767

0AC0H to 0ACFH

Error history data 13

Same as Error history data 1

2768 to 2783

0AD0H to 0ADFH

Error history data 14

Same as Error history data 1

2784 to 2799

0AE0H to 0AEFH

Error history data 15

Same as Error history data 1

2800 to 4095

0AF0H to 0FFFH

Use prohibited

*1 This is the value of factory default or the value of initialization by Error history clear command (address: 1000H).

Do not read or write data from/to any "Use prohibited" remote buffer memory areas. Otherwise, correct operation of the I/O module cannot be guaranteed.

Module control data area

Module control data

Remote buffer memory address

Decimal

Hexadecimal

4096

1000H

4097

1001H

4098 to 5375

1002H to 14FFH

Name

Default value*1

Error history clear command Error history clear completed Use prohibited

0000H 0000H

*1 This is the value for when the module power supply is turned off and on or at the remote reset.

Read/Write
R/W R

237 APPX
Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory

Details of remote buffer memory
This section describes the details of remote buffer memory addresses of the I/O module.

Error history data

Address

Name Error history data

Address 0A00H to 0AEFH

Description
Up to 15 errors generated in the module are recorded.
The following tables show the stored content for Error history data 1 (address: 0A00H to 0A0FH).

Address 0A00H 0A01H 0A02H 0A03H 0A04H 0A05H 0A06H 0A07H 0A08H 0A09H 0A0AH 0A0BH 0A0CH 0A0DH 0A0EH 0A0FH

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Error code

Order of occurrence

First two digits of the year

Last two digits of the year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

00H (fixed)

Error code details 1

Error code details 2

Error code details 3

Error code details 4

Error code details 5

Error code details 6

Error code details 7

Error code details 8

Error code details 9

Error code details 10

Item Error code Order of occurrence
First two digits of the year/Last two digits of the year*2 Month/Day*2 Hour/Minute*2 Second*2 Error code details 1 Error code details 2 Error code details 3 Error code details 4 Error code details 5 Error code details 6 Error code details 7 Error code details 8 Error code details 9 Error code details 10

Contents The error code for the error that occurred is stored. The order of error occurrence is stored. (A value between 0 and 65535 is stored.) When the value exceeds 65535, counting starts from zero. The date and time of error occurrence is stored in BCD code.
The detailed information of some errors is stored. The data to be stored depends on the error.
0 (fixed)

Storage example*1
2018H 0401H 1327H 5400H
0

*1 Values for when an error occurred at 13:27:54, April 1, 2018 *2 The clock information of the error that occurred is based on the clock information acquired from the CPU module of the master station.
When an error has occurred before the clock information is acquired from the CPU module, the error time is not recorded.

238 APPX Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory

Error history data 2 to Error history data 15 (address: 0A10H to 0AEFH) are stored in the same format as that of Error history data 1 (address: 0A00H to 0A0FH). For error codes, refer to the following. Page 211 Error Code List
Storage order of the error history
The latest error is stored in Error history data 1 (address: 0A00H to 0A0FH). Errors that occurred in the past are stored in Error history data 2 to Error history data 15 (address: 0A10H to 0AEFH) in reverse chronological order.
A
239 APPX
Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory

Error history clear command

Address

Name Error history clear command

Address 1000H

Description
The error history stored in the module is cleared.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 (fixed)

0: Not commanded 1: Commanded

Operation of error history clear
When Error history clear command (address: 1000H) is set to Commanded (1), the error history is cleared.

ON Error history clear command

(address: 1000H.b0)

OFF

Processing of the I/O module

Error history clear completed (address: 1001H.b0)

OFF

(1) ON

REMTO instruction REMFR instruction
Performed by I/O module Executed by the program (1) Error history clear processing

Read out data and check it periodically using the REMFR instruction.

� When the number of times that errors have been saved in the error history is the maximum number of times - 1 or when the maximum number of times has been reached, even if the Error history clear command (address: 1000H) is set to Commanded (1), the error history clear process is not performed. When the Error history clear command (address: 1000H) is set to Commanded (1), the Error history clear completed (address: 1001H) turns to Completed (1), but the error history remains uncleared.
� When the maximum number of times that errors can be saved in the error history is reached, an Error history save limit error (error code: 0220H) occurs.
Default value
The default value is Not commanded (0).

240 APPX Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory

Error history clear completed

Address

Name Error history clear completed

Address 1001H

Description
This remote buffer memory area shows whether the error history stored in the module is cleared or not.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 0 (fixed)

b0
0: Not performed 1: Completed

Operation of error history clear
When the error history clear is completed, Error history clear completed (address: 1001H) is turned to Completed (1).
For the timing of turning the bit to Not performed (0) Completed (1) Not performed (0), refer to the following. Page 240 Error history clear command

Default value
The default value is Not performed (0).

241 APPX
Appendix 3 Remote Buffer Memory

Appendix 4 CC-Link IE Field Network Processing
Time
The CC-Link IE Field Network processing time (transmission delay time) is structured as follows. Sequence scan time + link scan time + master station switching time + processing time of slave station = transmission delay time Among these, the processing time of slave station is expressed by either of the following. � Input reflection processing time of slave station (input) � Output reflection processing time of slave station (output) The calculation formula for each is as follows.
Input reflection processing time of slave station (input)
The input reflection processing time of the slave station (input) = Input response time*1 + Internal processing time (100s)
*1 If the input response time setting is "0ms", use 0.16ms for calculation.
Output reflection processing time of slave station (output)
The output reflection processing time of the slave station (output) = Output response time + Internal processing time (100s) For the output response time of the I/O module, refer to the following. Page 46 Output module, Page 79 I/O combined module

242

APPX Appendix 4 CC-Link IE Field Network Processing Time

Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Compliance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the EU Directives, has been a legal obligation for the products sold in European countries since 1996 as well as the Low Voltage Directive since 1997. Manufacturers who recognize their products are compliant to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are required to attach a "CE mark" on their products.

Sales representative in EU member states
Authorized representative in EU member states is shown below. Name: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. Address: Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany
Measures to comply with the EMC Directive
The EMC Directive specifies that "products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference (emissions) and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference (immunity)". This section summarizes the precautions on compliance with the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed with the module. These precautions are based on the requirements and the standards of the regulation, however, it does not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions will comply with abovementioned directives. The method and judgment for complying with the EMC Directive must be determined by the person who constructs the entire machinery.

EMC Directive related standards

Emission requirements

Specifications EN61131-2: 2007

Test item CISPR16-2-3 Radiated emission*2
CISPR16-2-1, CISPR16-1-2 Conducted emission*2

Test details

Standard value

Radio waves from the product are measured.

� 30M-230MHz QP: 40dBV/m (10m in measurement range)*1

� 230M-1000MHz QP: 47dBV/m

(10m in measurement range)

Noise from the product to the power line is measured.

� 150k-500kHz QP: 79dB, Mean: 66dB*1
� 500k-30MHz QP: 73dB, Mean:
60dB

*1 QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean: Average value *2 The module is an open type device (a device designed to be housed in other equipment) and must be installed inside a conductive
control panel. Except for the waterproof I/O module, the tests are conducted with the module installed in a control panel. (The I/O module (waterproof module) is tested outside the control panel.)

243 APPX
Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Immunity requirements

Specifications EN61131-2: 2007

Test item

Test details

Standard value

EN61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge immunity*1

Static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment.

� 8kV Air discharge � 4kV Contact discharge

EN61000-4-3 Radiated, radiofrequency, electromagnetic field immunity*1

Electric fields are radiated to the product.

80% AM modulation@1kHz � 80M-1000MHz: 10V/m � 1.4G-2.0GHz: 3V/m � 2.0G-2.7GHz: 1V/m

EN61000-4-4
Electrical fast transient/ burst immunity*1

Burst noise is applied to the power line and signal line.

� AC/DC main power, I/O power, AC I/O (unshielded): 2kV � DC I/O, analog, communication: 1kV

EN61000-4-5 Surge immunity*1

A lightning surge is applied to the power line and signal line.

� AC power line, AC I/O power, AC I/O (unshielded): 2kV CM,
1kV DM
� DC power line, DC I/O power: 0.5kV CM, DM � DC I/O, AC I/O (shielded), analog*2, communication: 1kV CM

EN61000-4-6
Conducted RF immunity*1

High frequency noise is applied to the power line and signal line.

0.15M-80MHz, 80% AM modulation @1kHz, 10Vrms

EN61000-4-8
Power-frequency magnetic field immunity*1

The product is installed in an inductive magnetic field.

50Hz/60Hz, 30A/m

EN61000-4-11
Voltage dips and interruption immunity*1

A momentary power failure is caused to the power supply voltage.

� Apply at 0%, 0.5 cycles and zero-cross point � 0%, 250/300 cycles (50/60Hz) � 40%, 10/12 cycles (50/60Hz) � 70%, 25/30 cycles (50/60Hz)

*1 The module is an open type device (a device designed to be housed in other equipment) and must be installed inside a conductive control panel. Except for the waterproof I/O module, the tests are conducted with the module installed in a control panel. (The I/O module (waterproof module) is tested outside the control panel.)
*2 The accuracy of an analog-digital converter module may temporarily vary within 10%.

Installation in a control panel
The module is open type devices and must be installed inside a control panel. This ensures safety as well as effective shielding of programmable controller-generated electromagnetic noise.
Control panel
� Use a conductive control panel. � When securing the top or bottom plate using bolts, cover the grounding part on the control panel so that the part will not be
painted. � To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and control panel, take measures such as covering the bolts so that
conductivity can be ensured in the largest possible area. � Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies. � Holes in the control panel must be 10cm diameter or less. If the holes are larger than 10cm in diameter, radio waves may
leak. In addition, because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel and its door, reduce the clearance as much as possible. The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface. Our tests have been carried out on a control panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB (max.) and 30dB (mean) (measured by 3m method, 30 to 300MHz).
Wiring of power cables and ground cables
Near the power supply part, provide a ground point to the control panel. Ground the FG terminal with the thickest and shortest possible ground cable (30cm or shorter).

244 APPX Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Cables
Use shielded cables for the cables which are connected to the module and run out from the control panel. If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly, the noise immunity will not meet the specified value.
Network cable
A shielded cable is used for the network cable. Strip a part of the jacket as shown below and ground the exposed shield in the largest possible area.
(1) (2) (1) Network cable (2) Shield
Grounding the cable clamp
Use shielded cables for external wiring and ground the shields of the external wiring cables to the control panel with the AD75CK-type cable clamp (Mitsubishi). (Ground the shield section 20 to 30cm away from the module.)
(2)
(1)

20 to 30 cm

AD75CK

(1) Module (2) Inside the control panel
For detail on AD75CK, refer to the following. AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual
External power supply
� Use a CE-marked product for an external power supply and always ground the FG terminal. (External power supply used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: TDK-Lambda DRJ100-24-1)
� Use a power cable of 10m or shorter when connecting it to the module power supply terminal. � Use a power cable of 30m or shorter when connecting it to the external power supply for output part. � Use a power cable of 3m or shorter when connecting it to the noise filter from the external power supply for output part.

245 APPX
Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

40-pin connector
When wiring the 40-pin connector, take the following measures to reduce noise.
Wiring example (when shielded cables are used)
The following figure shows an example of noise-reducing measures for wiring (when A6CON1 is used).

(1)

A6CON1

(2)

(3)
(1) Keep the distance between the connector and shielded cables as short as possible. (2) Use an FG wire of 2 or thicker and as short as possible to ground it to the control panel. (Ground the FG wire on the module side (at the closest possible
point to the module.)) (3) Use shielded cables.
Processing example of shielded cables
(1), (3)

(2)
(5) (4)
(1) Strip the jacket of each shielded cable. (2) Choose one shielded cable, and solder its shield to the FG wire. (3) Bind shields of shielded cables together with a conductive tape. (4) Cover connector pins with heat-shrinkable insulation tubes to protect signal wires. If signal wires are uncovered, they may be affected by static electricity,
resulting in malfunction of the module. (5) Cover the shields with an insulating tape.

246 APPX Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Others
Ferrite core
A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band. It is recommended to attach ferrite cores if shielded cables coming out of the control panel do not provide sufficient shielding effects. However, for an input module, attach a ferrite core to the cable of the power supply of the connection target device. Note that the ferrite cores must be attached at the position closest to the cable hole inside the control panel. If attached at an improper position, the ferrite core will not produce any effect. For Ethernet cables as well as terminals that are connected to the module power supply of the I/O module and the external power supply, attach a ferrite core 4cm away from the I/O module. The ferrite core has the effect of reducing externally conducted noise as well. For an input module and an I/O combined module, attach a ferrite core to the cable of the power supply of the connection target device. (Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: TOKIN Corporation ESD-SR-250, TDK Corporation ZCAT3035-1330) Ex. Ferrite core attachment example
When using the I/O module (waterproof module) with the shielded cables not grounded on the module side, attach a ferrite core to signal wires to prevent the noise induced to the cables from affecting a load connected to the module. (Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. MRFC-13)
A
247 APPX
Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Noise filter (power supply line filter)

A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise. Attaching the filter can suppress more noise. (The noise

filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10MHz or less.)

Connect a noise filter to the external power supply of the I/O module. Use a noise filter with the damping characteristics

equivalent to those of RSEN-2006 (manufactured by TDK-Lambda Corporation). Note that a noise filter is not required if the

module is used in Zone A defined in EN61131-2.

The precautions for attaching a noise filter are described below.

� Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter. If bundled, the output side noise will be

induced into the input side cables from which the noise was filtered.

Input side (power supply side)

� Problem example Noise is induced when the input and output cables are bundled.

Filter

Induction Output side (device side)

Input side (power supply side)

� Example of improvement Install the input and output cables separately.

Filter

Output side (device side)

� Ground the noise filter grounding terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable possible (approx. 10cm).

248 APPX Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
The module operates at the rated voltage of 24VDC. The Low Voltage Directive is not applied to the modules that operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC and 75VDC.
A
249 APPX
Appendix 5 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Appendix 6 How to Check Production Information
and Firmware Version
Check the production information and the firmware version of an I/O module with the following. � Rating plate � CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics

To check the firmware version of an I/O module after performing a firmware update on it, do it in CC-Link IE TSN communication mode. CC-Link IE TSN Remote I/O Module User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN Communication Mode)

Checking on the rating plate

I/O module (except for waterproof module)

(1)

(3)

(4)

MODEL
MAC ADD. SERIAL

TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

(2)

(1) MAC address (2) Production information (3) Relevant standard symbol (4) QR code
I/O module (waterproof module)

(1)

(4)

MODEL
MAC ADD. SERIAL

(2)

(3)

(1) MAC address (2) Production information (3) Relevant standard symbol (4) QR code

250

APPX Appendix 6 How to Check Production Information and Firmware Version

Checking by using CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics Operating procedure
1. Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module. 2. Start CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics from the menu.
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics]
3. Right-click the slave station whose production information you want to display, and select "Production Information". 4. The production information appears. (The first two digits show the firmware version.)
A

APPX Appendix 6 How to Check Production Information and Firmware Version

251

54.5

3.5

Appendix 7 External Dimensions
Spring clamp terminal block type
16-point module
147

(1)

35.5

(1) Center of DIN rail
(Unit: mm)
32-point module
179

(1)

35.5

(1) Center of DIN rail
(Unit: mm)

54.5

3.5

252 APPX Appendix 7 External Dimensions

Screw terminal block type
16-point module
147

54.5

(1)

3.5

35.5

21.5

(1) Center of DIN rail
(Unit: mm)
32-point module
200

54.5

(1)

3.5

35.5

21.5

(1) Center of DIN rail

(Unit: mm)

40-pin connector type

179

54.5

(1)

3.5

35.5

3.4

(1) Center of DIN rail
(Unit: mm)

253 APPX
Appendix 7 External Dimensions

54.5

3.5

26 238

Sensor connector (e-CON) type
200

(1)

4.1

(1) Center of DIN rail
(Unit: mm)

Waterproof/dustproof connector type

37.5 2

(1) 63 28�1

4.7

231.5�0.2

(2) (1) 2-4.5 8 slotted hole (M4 mounting screw) (2) M4 mounting screw
(Unit: mm)
254 APPX Appendix 7 External Dimensions

MEMO
A 255 APPX
Appendix 7 External Dimensions

INDEX
A Applicable master station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Applicable profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
C
CC-Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 CC-Link IE Field Network synchronous communication setting status (RWr2.b4, RWr2.b5) . . . . . . . . . . 228 Compatible software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Connector for I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connector for module power supply and FG . . . . 18
D DATA LINK LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DIN rail hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
E ERR. LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Error clear request flag (RWw0.b10) . . . . . . . . . 232 Error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Error flag (RWr0.b10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Error history clear command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Error history clear completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Error history data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 External input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 External output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
External power supply monitor request (RWw2.b9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 External power supply monitor status (RWr2.b9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
F Fast Link-Up Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fast link-up setting status (PORT1) (RWr2.b6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Fast link-up setting status (PORT2) (RWr2.b7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Function selection setting area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Function selection status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Function setting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Function setting switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
H Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
I I/O PW LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 I/O terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Input response setting status (RWr2.b0 to RWr2.b2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Installation direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
256

IP address/station number setting switch. . . . . . . . 17
M Measures to comply with the EMC Directive . . . .243 Module operation area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Module status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Mounting the I/O modules (except for waterproof module) on a DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
O
Output HOLD/CLEAR setting status (RWr2.b3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Output Y current value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Output Y OFF information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Output Y OFF information clear request . . . . . . . 234 Output Y ON information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Output Y ON information clear request . . . . . . . .234 Overheat protection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Overload protection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
P P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 P1 LINK LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 P2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 P2 LINK LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 PW LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
R
Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 RUN LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
S
Setting the IP address/station number setting switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
T
Terminal block for module power supply and FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

MEMO

I 257

REVISIONS

*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision date November 2019 May 2020
July 2020 April 2021
July 2021

*Manual number SH(NA)-082240ENG-A SH(NA)-082240ENG-B
SH(NA)-082240ENG-C SH(NA)-082240ENG-D
SH(NA)-082240ENG-E

Revision
First edition
Added models NZ2GNCF1-32D, NZ2GNCE3-32D, NZ2GNCF1-32T, NZ2GNCE3-32DT Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, RELEVANT MANUALS, Section 1.1, Chapter 2, Section 3.2, 3.3, 5.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.6, 6.8, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 9.1, Chapter 10, Section 11.1, 11.2, 11.4, 11.6, 11.7, Appendix 1, 2, 5, 6, 7
Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
Added models NZ2GN2S1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN2S1-16TE, NZ2GN2B1-16TE, NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16DE, NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN12A2-16TE, NZ2GN12A42-16DT, NZ2GN12A42-16DTE Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 6.3, Chapter 7, Section 8.1, 9.1, 9.3, 9.4, Chapter 11, Section 12.4, Appendix 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7
Added or modified parts Section 6.9

Japanese manual number: SH-082239-E
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2019 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

258

WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term] The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. [Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which
follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided. 4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced. 5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
259

TRADEMARKS
QR Code is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in the United States, Japan, and/or other countries. The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

260

SH(NA)-082240ENG-E

SH(NA)-082240ENG-E(2107)MEE

MODEL:

CCIETSNIEF-IO-U-E

MODEL CODE: 13JX2F

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.